Yamaha RX A3050/RX A2050 Owner’s Manual Web YH116A0 EN A3050 Om UCRABGLF

User Manual: Yamaha RX-A3050/RX-A2050 Owner’s Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 193

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

AV Receiver

Owner’s Manual
Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.

English

CONTENTS
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

8 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

FEATURES

9 Configuring the necessary speaker settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 51

What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Useful applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Selecting the connection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

PREPARATIONS

Connecting the unit to a wireless network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

PLAYBACK

1 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Basic speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Advanced speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

2 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

3 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD3/CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

5 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna . . . . 47

Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Connecting the network cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Preparing the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

6 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

7 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
En

Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Playing back music via Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

CONFIGURATIONS

Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

120

Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
(DSP Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

DSP Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Playback of Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138

Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141

Playing back music with AirPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . 103

Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

Multi-zone configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

Preparing the multi zone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152

Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153

Registering favorite items (shortcut) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 154

Registering an item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154

Recalling a registered item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 156

Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) . . . . . . . . . . . 111

ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159

Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Registering the remote control code for a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Registering the remote control codes for playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Resetting remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

APPENDIX

164

Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Network information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Supported devices and file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Multi-zone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Audio Return Channel (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Accessories

Operating range of the remote control

Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.

• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range
shown below.

 Remote control

 Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)

Within
6 m (20 ft)
30°

30°

Insert the batteries the right
way round.

 AM antenna

 FM antenna

*One of the above is supplied depending on the region of purchase.

 YPAO microphone

 Microphone base
Pole
(RX-A3050 only)
• The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the RX-A3050 (U.S.A. model), unless
otherwise specified.
• In this manual, illustrations of English menu screens are used as examples.
*Using for angle/height measurement during YPAO.

• Some features are not available in certain regions.

 Power cable

 CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)
 Easy Setup Guide
 Safety Brochure

• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.
• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
• This manual describes all the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to both “iPod” and
“iPhone” unless otherwise specified.

*The supplied power cable varies depending on the region
of purchase.

•

indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.

•

indicates supplementary explanations for better use.

FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
Wide variety of supported content
• Bluetooth
• iPod/iPhone
• USB
• Media server (PC/NAS)
• Internet radio
• AirPlay

.
.
.
.
.
.

Supports 2- to 9-channel (plus rear presence)
speaker system and up to 2 subwoofer
connections. Allows you to enjoy favorite acoustic
spaces in various styles.

p.86
p.87
p.90
p.94
p.98
p.101

• Automatically optimizing the speaker . p.51
settings to suit your room (YPAO)
• Reproducing stereo or multichannel . p.76
sounds with the sound fields like
actual movie theaters and concert halls
(CINEMA DSP)
• Enjoying compressed music with
. p.80
enhanced sound (Compressed Music
Enhancer)

Control

Network contents
iPod/iPhone/
Bluetooth device

Speakers

Audio

Audio
USB device

• Bi-amp connections, channel
expansion (with external power-amp)
and multi-zone configurations to
enhance your system

. p.28

HDMI Control

4K Ultra HD signals and HDCP 2.2 supported
Audio
HDMI Control
Audio/Video
Audio/Video

BD/DVD player

AV receiver (the unit)
Playback of Dolby Atmos contents
supported

Change the input source and favorite
settings with one touch (SCENE)

. p.20

. p.73

Sequential operation of a TV,
AV receiver, and BD/DVD
player (HDMI Control)
TV remote control

. p.182

Full of useful functions!

Useful tips

❑ Connecting various devices (p.42)
A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks
on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as
BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),
game consoles, camcorders, and other devices.

❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound
with a single HDMI cable connection
(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.39)
When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one
HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio
input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control
signals.
HDMI Control
TV audio

❑ Surround playback with 5 speakers placed
in front (p.78)
If you have surround speakers but there is no space to
place them in the rear of your room, you can place them in
the front and enjoy multichannel surround sound with the
5 speakers placed in the front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT).

❑ Operating external devices with the
supplied remote control (p.160)
You can operate external devices with the supplied
remote control by registering the remote control codes of
the external devices (such as a TV and BD/DVD players).

❑ Low power consumption (p.153)
The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the
unit’s power consumption.

Video from
external device

I want to connect a playback device using HDMI for
video and non-HDMI for audio...
Use “Audio Select” in the “Option” menu to specify the
type of an audio input jack to be used for the
corresponding input source (p.119).
Video and audio are not synchronized...
Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay
between video and audio output (p.138).
I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...
Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the
output destination of signals input into the unit (p.143).
Your TV speakers may be selected as an output
destination.
I want to get more bass sounds…
Set “Extra Bass” in the “Option” menu to “On” to enjoy
enhanced bass sounds (p.117).
I want to change the on-screen menu language...
Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a
language from English, Japanese, French, German,
Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.49).

❑ Various wireless connection methods
(p.63)

I want to update the firmware...

The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to
connect to your wireless router (access point) without a
network cable connection. In addition, Wireless Direct
enables connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
without router.

Use “FIRM UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu
to update the unit’s firmware (p.159). If the unit is
connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed
on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.163).
Many other settings are available that let you to
customize the unit. For details, see the following pages.
• Input settings (p.121)
• SCENE settings (p.123)

Wi-Fi or
Wireless Direct

• Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.127)
• Various function settings (p.130)
• Information view (such as audio signal and video
signal) (p.154)
• System settings (p.156)
En

CINEMA DSP
The excitement of a concert hall and the powerful sense of being inside a movie - we all want to enjoy these experiences in our own living room. Yamaha has pursued the fulfillment
of these desires for more than 20 years, and this fulfillment has now taken shape as the Yamaha AV receivers.

What is a sound field?

CINEMA DSP/CINEMA DSP 3D

We perceive sound from a voice or an instrument not only as the sounds that are heard
directly but also as the “reflected” or “reverberant” sound that has been reflected by the
walls or ceiling of the building. The character of the reflected and reverberant sound is
affected by the shape, size, and material of the building, and all of these sounds taken
together are what give us the auditory sensation of being in that specific place.

Yamaha has accumulated a massive amount of acoustical data by analyzing the actual
sound fields of concert halls and performance spaces around the world. “CINEMA
DSP” allows this data to be applied to create sound fields. This unit contains a wide
variety of sound programs using CINEMA DSP.
By selecting a sound program that is appropriate to the content of the playback source
such as movies, music, or games, you can maximize the acoustical effectiveness of
that specific content. (For example, a sound program designed for movies can give you
the sensation of actually being in that scene.)

This unique acoustical character of a specific space is what we call the “sound field”.
Conceptual diagram of a concert hall’s sound field

In addition, the “CINEMA DSP 3D” function uses 3-dimensional sound field data that
includes the axis of height, generating an even more realistic sound field with a spatial
sense.

CINEMA DSP HD3
“CINEMA DSP HD3” is Yamaha’s flagship 3D sound field playback technology that
takes full advantage of the massive amount of acoustic reflection data included in the
sound field data. With support for rear presence speaker output, it delivers more than
twice as much capability for generating acoustic reflections as conventional CINEMA
DSP 3D, in addition to high-frequency playback capability, delivering an utterly natural
and powerful spatial sound field.

Conceptual diagram of a sound field created by the unit

Level

Capability for reproducing reflections
(when the sound program “Hall in Munich” is selected)
CINEMA DSP HD3

CINEMA DSP 3D

Time

YPAO

Unrivaled audio and video quality

YPAO is Yamaha original automatic calibration system to optimizing your sound and
surround environment by using microphone measurement. It can be create ideal
listening environment for maximizing high sound quality contents playback by adjusting
various speakers setting and the sound field automatically.

High-resolution music enhancer
Hi-bit high-sampling extension up to 96 kHz / 24-bit can be applied to lossless 44.1/48
kHz content such as from a CD (2-channel PCM) or a FLAC file for further heightening
of the musicality in the original content (p.118).

YPAO-R.S.C.

Before processing
Loudness

In typical home, the sound
Level
has problems such as a
blurred low-frequency range
or a smearing of the
Compensation
acoustical sound image
caused by undesirable
Time
sound reflection from the
walls or ceiling.
“YPAO-R.S.C.” is technology that reduces only the unwanted reflections and produces
the acoustic perfection for your listening environment.

Playback bandwidth of a 44.1/48 kHz
signal (such as a CD)

Frequency

After processing

High

YPAO Volume ON
Level

YPAO Volume automatically adjusts the high
and low frequency levels at any volume level so
that you hear natural sounds even at low
volume.

Playback bandwidth of a
88.2/96 kHz signal

Loudness

YPAO Volume

Low

YPAO Volume OFF
Frequency

Frequency

High

High-quality video processing
YPAO 3D measurement

From low-quality digital video to BD (Blu-ray disc) images, any content can be played
back as a high-quality image (p.141).

The direction (angle) of front, surround and presence speakers,
and the height of presence speakers as seen from the listening
position is measured, and compensation is applied to maximize
the 3D sound field effectiveness of the CINEMA DSP.

• Motion adaptive and edge adaptive deinterlacing
• Multi-cadence (including 3-2 pull-down) detection
• Up to 6 presets that can be applied separately to each input source
You can also apply fine touches such as detail enhancement and edge enhancement.

Expandable to meet diverse needs
Support for bi-amp connections and external power amp
expansion

Multi-zone function
The multi-zone function (p.103) allows you to play back different input sources in the room
where the unit is installed (main zone) and in other rooms (such as Zone2).

To obtain even high audio quality, you can connect front speakers that support power
amp expansion, or expand your system by adding an external power amp (such as a
Hi-Fi amp).

(The following shows examples of use.)
Enjoying music using speakers in another room

For details, refer to “Advanced speaker configuration” (p.28).

While enjoying multichannel playback in your living room, you can listen to music
through the speakers of a different room.

The best expandability in Yamaha
By connecting an external power amp, you can
enjoy the highest peak of CINEMA DSP
- an 11.2-channel 3-dimensional sound field.
(Example)
External power amp

Study room
(such as Zone2)

Living room (main zone)

Enjoying videos using a TV in another room
(HDMI connection)
While enjoying multichannel playback in your living room, you can enjoy videos and
music being input via HDMI on a TV in a different room.

Kitchen
(such as Zone4)

Living room (main zone)

Useful applications
■ AV CONTROLLER

■ AV SETUP GUIDE (for tablet)

“AV CONTROLLER” will turn your smartphone/tablet into a Wi-Fi enabled remote control
for your Yamaha network products. This application provides you the flexibility to control
the available inputs, volume, mute, power commands and playback source.

“AV SETUP GUIDE” is an application that assists you with cable connections between
AV receiver and source devices as well as AV receiver setup. This application guides
you through the various settings such as speaker connections, TV and video/audio
device connections and selecting the speaker system.

Functions

• Power on/off and volume adjustment

• Connection guide (speakers, TV and video/audio devices)

• Input, scene and sound mode selection

• Setup guide (YPAO settings and various setup assistance with illustrations)

• DSP Parameter adjustment

• Viewing owner’s manual

• Playback control (including music selection for some sources)

• For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App Store or Google Play.

• For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google Play.

Part names and functions
Front panel
1

MAIN ZONE
PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

INPUT
ON SCREEN

OPTION

SCENE

TONE/BALANCE STRAIGHT
1

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

INFO (WPS)

MEMORY

PRESET

TUNING

(CONNECT)

MULTI ZONE

PROGRAM
ENTER

RETURN

ZONE 4

VIDEO AUX

PHONES

6
1 MAIN ZONE z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

2 Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.143)
• Standby Through is enabled (p.144)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.145)
• Bluetooth Standby is enabled (p.147)
• An iPod is being charged (p.87)

ZONE CONTROL

DISPLAY

YPAO MIC

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

AUDIO

HDMI IN

6 INPUT knob

Opening the front panel door

Selects an input source.

7 Front panel door
For protecting controls and jacks (p.13).

8 VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.

3 Front display
Displays information (p.14).

4 Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.5).

5 PURE DIRECT key
Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.80).

• To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently
press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed
when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.
(Be careful not to trap your fingers.)

■ Inside of the front panel door
9

AB C

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SCENE

TONE/BALANCE STRAIGHT
1

INFO (WPS)

MEMORY

PRESET

TUNING

(CONNECT)

MULTI ZONE

PROGRAM
ENTER
ZONE 2
RETURN

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

VIDEO AUX

PHONES

M
9 ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.

0 Menu operations keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER
Confirms a selected item.
RETURN
Returns to the previous screen.

A OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.115).

B DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.114).

C TONE/BALANCE key
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range
of output sounds (p.116).
Adjusts the left/right channel volume balance for Zone2 or
Zone3 (p.109).

D STRAIGHT key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.79).

E PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.75).

F SCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.73).

ZONE CONTROL

DISPLAY

YPAO MIC

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

AUDIO

HDMI IN

G MULTI ZONE keys
ZONE 2–4
ZONE CONTROL

N YPAO MIC jack

Enables/disables the audio output to
each zone (p.108).
Changes the zone that is controlled by
the keys and knobs on the front panel
(p.108).

H INFO (WPS) key
Selects the information displayed on the front display
(p.114).
Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push
button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.66).

I MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.82).
Registers USB/network contents as shortcuts (p.110).

J FM and AM keys
Switch between FM and AM (p.82).

K PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.83).
Selects a USB/network content from shortcuts (p.110).

L TUNING keys
Select the radio frequency (p.82).

M USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.90) or an iPod
(p.87).

For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.51).

O PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.

P VIDEO AUX jacks
For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game
console (p.45).

Front display (indicators)

1 23

ECO

MUTE VOLUME

ZONE ZONE ZONE SLEEP
3
4
IN OUT 1 2 3 2
ENHANCER
PARTY
STEREO TUNED
HD 3

Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.

IN
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input.

OUT1/OUT2
Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI
signal.

2 ECO
Lights up when the unit is in the eco mode (p.153).

3 Signal strength indicator
Indicates the strength of the wireless network signal (p.63).

4 ZONE indicators
Lights up when Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 is enabled (p.108).

5 SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.

6 Information display
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound
mode name). You can switch the information by pressing
INFO (p.114).
Blinks when audio is muted.

8 Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.

FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1
SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

CD E

1 HDMI

7 MUTE

ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL

9 VIRTUAL

(RX-A3050 U.S.A. model)

D PARTY

Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) or Virtual
Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) (p.76) or the virtual surround
processing (p.78) is working.

Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.109)

E Cursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.

0 Bluetooth indicator
Lights up when the unit is connecting to a Bluetooth device
(p.86).

F ADAPTIVE DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.116) is working.

G Speaker indicators

A ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.80) is
working.

B CINEMA DSP indicator
(RX-A3050)
“CINEMA DSP HD” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.76) is
working. “CINEMA DSP !” lights up when CINEMA DSP HD3
is activated.
(RX-A2050)
“CINEMA DSP” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.76) is
working. “CINEMA DSP n” lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D
is activated.

C STEREO
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.

TUNED
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station
signal.
En

Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
A Front speaker (L)
S Front speaker (R)
D Center speaker
F Surround speaker (L)
G Surround speaker (R)
H Surround back speaker (L)
J Surround back speaker (R)
K Surround back speaker
B Front presence speaker (L)
N Front presence speaker (R)
M Rear presence speaker (L)
< Rear presence speaker (R)
C Subwoofer (1)
V Subwoofer (2)

Rear panel
1

9 @

A B C

D
(RX-A3050 U.S.A. model)

HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

NETWORK

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

( 3 NET )

WIRELESS

AV 7

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

AC IN

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 3

AV 4

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

TRIGGER
OUT

REMOTE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

PHONO

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

RS-232C

OUT

(2 TV)

AV 1

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

PR Y

AV 3

PRE OUT

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

SUBWOOFER

GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F. PRESENCE R. PRESENCE

FRONT

(REAR)

CENTER

SPEAKERS

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP2

CENTER

FRONT

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F. PRESENCE/BI-AMP
EXTRA SP1

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

75Ω

* The area around the video/audio output
jacks is marked in white on the actual
product to prevent improper connections.

SINGLE

1 PHONO jacks
For connecting to a turntable (p.44).

2 AUDIO 1–3 jacks
For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting
audio signals (p.44).

3 AV 1–4 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.42).

4 HDMI OUT 1 jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.39). When using ARC, TV audio signal
can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.41), or for connecting to an
HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 or Zone4 (p.106).

5 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
(component/composite video) jacks
For connecting to a TV that supports component or
composite video and outputting video signals (p.40) or for
connecting to a zone video monitor used in Zone2 or Zone3
(p.105).

6 HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.42).

7 COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1–3) jacks
For connecting to video playback devices that support
component video and inputting video signals (p.43).

8 TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks
For connecting to devices that support the trigger function
(p.48).

9 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that
allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another
room (p.107).

0 NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.47).

A Wireless antenna
For connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.63).

B RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation.
Consult your dealer for details.

C VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage
(p.48).

D AC IN jack
For connecting the supplied power cable (p.48).

(RX-A3050 U.S.A. model)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

NETWORK

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

( 3 NET )

WIRELESS

AV 7

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

AC IN

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 3

AV 4

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

TRIGGER
OUT

REMOTE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

PHONO

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

RS-232C

OUT

(2 TV)

AV 1

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

PR Y

AV 3

PRE OUT

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

SUBWOOFER

GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F. PRESENCE R. PRESENCE

FRONT

(REAR)

CENTER

SPEAKERS

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP2

CENTER

FRONT

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F. PRESENCE/BI-AMP
EXTRA SP1

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

75Ω

* The area around the video/audio output
jacks is marked in white on the actual
product to prevent improper connections.

SINGLE

E ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.46).

F ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks (RX-A3050)
For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or
Zone3 and outputting audio (p.105), or for connecting to an
external power amplifier for front presence or rear presence
channels (p.37).

ZONE OUT jacks (RX-A2050)
For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or
Zone3 and outputting audio (p.105).

G SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to speakers (p.19).

H PRE OUT jacks
For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.26) or
to an external power amplifier (p.37).

Remote control
1 Remote control signal transmitter

Transmits infrared signals.

2 SOURCE z key

RECEIVER

SOURCE

Turns on/off an external device.
AV

SOURCE key

V-AUX

Sets the remote control to operate external devices (p.161).
This key lights up in green after pressed.

PHONO

RECEIVER key

AUDIO

TUNER

USB

BLUETOOTH

Sets the remote control to operate the unit (p.161). This key
lights up in orange after pressed.

NET

RECEIVER z key

4
5

MAIN 2 3 4

PARTY

SCENE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

VOLUME

MUTE

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

I
J
K

3 Input selection keys

DISPLAY

TUNING

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

6 PROGRAM keys

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

MEMORY
10

ENT

7 External device operation keys
Select menus for external devices (p.161).
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.

TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

Select a sound mode (p.75).

C INFO key
D SLEEP key
Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a
specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press
repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off).

E Numeric keys
Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.

MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets (p.82).

F TV operation keys
Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV
operations (p.160).
Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output
(p.72).
Turns on/off the party mode (p.109).

I VOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.
Mutes the audio output.

K OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.115).

L DISPLAY key

8 ON SCREEN key

INPUT

B Sound mode keys

J MUTE key

Select a sound program (p.75).
3

Let you play back and perform other operations for external
devices when an input source other than “TUNER” is
selected (p.161).

H PARTY key

Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.73).

PRESET

External device operation keys

G HDMI OUT key

Changes the zone that is controlled by the remote control
(p.108).

5 SCENE keys

BAND
MODE

Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the
input source (p.81).
BAND
Switches between FM and AM radio.
PRESET
Select a preset station.
TUNING
Select the radio frequency.

Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.114).

Select an input source for playback.
AV 1–7
AV 1–7 jacks
V-AUX
VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
AUDIO 1–3 AUDIO 1–3 jacks
PHONO
PHONO jacks
TUNER
FM/AM radio
BLUETOOTH Bluetooth connection
(the unit as a Bluetooth receiver)
USB
USB jack (on the front panel)
NET
NETWORK sources (press repeatedly to select
a desired network source)

4 ZONE switch

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

ENTER

RETURN

B
C
D
E

G
H

POP-UP/MENU

:
A

HDMI OUT

ZONE

A Radio keys

9 Menu operation keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER
Confirms a selected item.
RETURN
Returns to the previous screen.

0 MODE key
Switches the iPod operation modes (p.89).
En

Displays status information on the TV (p.114).

M CODE SET key
Registers remote control codes of external devices on the
remote control (p.160).

• To operate external devices with the remote control, register a
remote control code for each device before using (p.160).

PREPARATIONS
General setup procedure
1 Connecting speakers (p.19)

Basic speaker configuration (p.20)
Select the speaker layout and connect the speakers to the unit.
Advanced speaker configuration (p.28)
Apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone
configurations to enhance the system.

2 Connecting a TV (p.39)

Connect a TV to the unit.

3 Connecting playback devices (p.42)

Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.

4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.46)

Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

Connecting a network cable or preparing
the wireless antenna (p.47)

Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless antenna for
establishing a wireless network connection.

6 Connecting other devices (p.48)

Connect external devices such as devices compatible with the trigger function.

7 Connecting the power cable (p.48)

After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.

8 Selecting an on-screen menu language (p.49)

Select the desired on-screen menu language.

9 Configuring the necessary speaker settings (p.50)

According to your speaker configuration, you need to configure some speaker settings manually before
performing YPAO.

Optimizing the speaker settings
automatically (YPAO) (p.51)

11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.63)

Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room
(YPAO).

Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless connection.

This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!
En

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

1 Connecting speakers
The unit has 9 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 11 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.
You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.28).
Caution
• Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.26).

Ideal speaker layout

Functions of each speaker
Speaker type

Abbr.

Function

Front (L)

Front (R)

Center

Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and
vocals).

Surround (L)

Surround (R)

Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers
also produce surround back channel sounds when no surround
back speakers are connected.

Surround back (L)

Surround back (R)

Front presence (L)

Front presence (R)

Rear presence (L)

Rear presence (R)

Subwoofer

0.5 to 1 mR
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

E 0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds).

1.8 m
(5.9 ft)

Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.

Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA
DSP HD3 (RX-A3050) or CINEMA DSP 3D (RX-A2050) (p.76), the
presence speakers create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in
your room.

10°~30°

Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and
reinforces bass parts of other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the
unit and place them on the left/right (or front/rear) sides of the room.

Y
6

1.8 m
(5.9 ft)

• Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the
speaker layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker
settings (such as distances) to suit the speaker layout.
• When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL”
and “SBR” in the diagram).
• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to
produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we
recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and
rear presence speakers for further spatial sounds).
• (RX-A3050 only)
The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to
produce natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected but no rear
presence speakers.
En

10°~30°

7
0.3 m (1 ft) or more

1.8 m
(5.9 ft)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Basic speaker configuration
■ Placing speakers in your room
Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples.

❑ 9.2-channel system [★5.1.4]
(using rear presence speakers)

• To play back Dolby Atmos contents, apply a speaker system with a ★ mark.
• (About the number of channels) For example, “5.1.2” denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead
speaker channels”. For details on how to place overhead speakers (presence speakers), see “Presence
speaker layout” (p.24).

E
1

❑ 9.2+2-channel system [★5.1.4]
(using both surround back and rear presence speakers)
E

2
3

R
1

2
3

9
T

Y
6

This speaker system uses the front and rear presence speakers to produce a
highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back
Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound
field. This system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel
contents.

This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy
a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.

• When using front presence and rear presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby
Enabled speakers as the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence/Rear Presence)”
setting in the “Setup” menu before performing YPAO (p.50).

• The surround back speakers and rear presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit
automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the selected sound program (p.76).
• When using front presence and rear presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby
Enabled speakers as the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence/Rear Presence)”
setting in the “Setup” menu before performing YPAO (p.50).
• (RX-A3050 only)
By using an external power amplifier (p.29), you can make an 11-channel system [★7.1.4] and enjoy Dolby
Atmos contents with the front presence and rear presence speakers.
En

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
❑ 9.2-channel system [★7.1.2] (using surround back speakers)
E

❑ 7.1-channel system [★5.1.2] (using front presence speakers)

R
1

2
3

5
6

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds
using the surround back speakers.

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)
using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This
system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.

• When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as
the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before
performing YPAO (p.50).

• (RX-A3050 only)
This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround
speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
❑ 7.1-channel system [★7.1.0] (using surround back speakers)

❑ 5.1-channel system

This speaker system creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front,
center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows
you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.

This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual
Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to
the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for
7.1-channel contents.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
❑ Front 5.1-channel system (using surround speakers)

❑ Front 5.1-channel system (using front presence speakers)

Even when surround speakers are placed in the front side, the unit creates the virtual
surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual
CINEMA FRONT) when “Layout (Surround)” (p.136) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”.

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front
speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP).

• You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
❑ 2.1-channel system

❑ Presence speaker layout
The unit provides three layout patterns for presence speakers (Front Height/Rear
Height, Overhead and Dolby Enabled SP). Choose a layout pattern that suits your
listening environment.

• You can enjoy Dolby Atmos or Cinema DSP HD3/Cinema DSP 3D with any layout pattern.
• You can configure the placement patterns for front presence and rear presence speakers separately.

Front Height/Rear Height
Install the presence speakers on the front/rear side wall.
It delivers a natural sound field with excellent linkage of left, right, top and bottom
sound spaces, and sound extensity effectively.

Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround
speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound
(Virtual CINEMA DSP).

Overhead
Install the presence speakers to the ceiling above the listening position.
It delivers realistic overhead sound effects and sound field with excellent linkage of
front and rear sound spaces effectively.

• Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system.

• For details on the installation position of ceiling speakers, see “Notes on installation of ceiling speakers”
(p.25).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Dolby Enabled SP

Notes on installation of ceiling speakers

Use the Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers.

When installing presence speakers to a ceiling, use the following illustration as a
reference.

It utilizes sounds reflected from ceiling and lets you enjoy overhead sounds only from
speakers that are placed at the same level as traditional speakers.

When using two presence speakers

FPR

When using four presence speakers

FPR

RPR

FR
SBR

SBR
C

SBL
FL

FPL

RPL

• Place the Dolby Enabled speakers on top of or near the traditional front speakers. A Dolby Enabled
speaker unit may be integrated into a traditional speaker. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the
Dolby Enabled speakers.

Installation position

Just above the listening position, or the
ceiling between extensions of front
speakers and listening position

Front presence speakers:
the ceiling between the extensions of the
front speakers and listening position
Rear presence speakers:
the ceiling between the extensions of the
listening position and surround (or
surround back) speakers

Caution
• Be sure to use speakers that are made for ceiling use and take anti-drop measures. Ask a qualified
contractor or dealer personnel for installation works.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

■ Setting the speaker impedance

■ Connecting speakers

Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When using a
6-ohm speaker for any channel, set the speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case,
you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.

Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall
outlet.

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press
MAIN ZONE z.
MAIN ZONE z

Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the
speakers.
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the
unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,
“Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.

Speakers to be connected

STRAIGHT
Room

Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display.

SPEAKER IMP.
8¬MIN

4
5

Main zone
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

Press STRAIGHT to select “6  MIN”.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the
power cable from the AC wall outlet.

You are now ready to connect the speakers.

Speaker type

Speaker system
(the number of channels)

Abbr.

9+2

Front (L)

●

Front (R)

●

Center

●

Surround (L)

●

*5

Surround (R)

●

*5

Surround back (L)

●

*1

*3

Surround back (R)

●

*1

*3

Front presence (L)

●

*4

*6

Front presence (R)

●

*4

*6

Rear presence (L)

●

*2

Rear presence (R)

●

*2

Power Amp
Assign
(p.133)

Basic (default)

If you have nine speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or rear
presence speakers (*2). If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back
speakers (*3) or front presence speakers (*4). If you have five speakers, use two of
them as surround speakers (*5) or front presence speakers (*6).

• You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. When using 2 subwoofers,
configure the “Layout (Subwoofer)” setting (p.136) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to
an AC wall outlet.
• To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an
external power amplifier” (p.37).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Cables necessary for connection (commercially available)

❑ Connecting speaker cables

Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)

Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the
unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are
colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire
to the positive terminal.

+
–

Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)

a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and
twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together.

Connection diagram

b Loosen the speaker terminal.

Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit.

c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the
terminal.

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

d Tighten the terminal.

The unit (rear)
ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F. PRESENCE R. PRESENCE

FRONT

SURROUND

(REAR)

SUR. BACK

SUBWOOFER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

CENTER

SPEAKERS

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP2

CENTER

FRONT

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F. PRESENCE/BI-AMP
EXTRA SP1

+ (red)

FR
ON

SINGLE

– (black)

Using a banana plug
(U.S.A., Canada, Australia and General models only)
a Tighten the speaker terminal.
E

R
1

b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.

Banana plug
9

FR
ON

b
4

❑ Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)
Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.
T

Audio pin cable
6

PRE

OUT

(SING

LE)

(FR
ONT)
1

2
SURR
UND

SUR.
BACK

(RE

SUBW AR)
OOFE
R
SURR
OUN
D BA
CK

CENT

• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side).
En

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Advanced speaker configuration
In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.20), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system.

Using the four internal
amplifiers for front speakers to
have more high-quality sounds

Bi-amp connection

Combining with an external
power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier,
multichannel amplifier, etc.) to
build an extended system

Using the excess internal
amplifiers for stereo speakers
in another room

Power-amp channel expansion

(Example)

Multi-zone configuration

(Example)

(Example)
External power
amplifier

Bi-amp
connection

Zone2

Main zone

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

■ Available speaker configurations
(RX-A3050)
Main zone
Speaker configuration

Output channel
(max)

Bi-amp

Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone



Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone and multi-zone speakers



Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone and power-amp channel
expansion (for presence channels)

Using power-amp channel expansion (for front and/or presence
channels)

Using power-amp channel expansion (for front channels) and
multi-zone speakers



External power
amplifier (required)

Power Amp Assign (p.133)

Page

7ch BI-AMP

+1 room

7ch BI-AMP +1ZONE

7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP

Front presence
Rear presence

Rear Presence

9ch +RP

Front

9ch +FRONT

Front presence
Rear presence

7ch +FP+RP

32
33

Front

+1 room

7ch +FRONT+1ZONE

Front

+2 rooms

5ch +FRONT+2ZONE

+1 room

7ch +1ZONE

+1 room

9ch +1ZONE

+2 rooms

7ch +2ZONE

Multi-zone

Power Amp Assign (p.133)

Page

7ch BI-AMP

+1 room

7ch BI-AMP +1ZONE

30
33

7
Using multi-zone speakers

Multi-zone

(RX-A2050)
Main zone
Speaker configuration

Output channel
(max)

Bi-amp

External power
amplifier (required)

Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone



Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone and multi-zone speakers



Using power-amp channel expansion (for front channels) and
multi-zone speakers

Front

+1 room

7ch +FRONT+1ZONE

Front

+2 rooms

5ch +FRONT+2ZONE

+1 room

7ch +1ZONE

+1 room

9ch +1ZONE

+2 rooms

7ch +2ZONE

7
Using multi-zone speakers

• When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the
“Setup” menu (p.50).
• When applying a multi-zone configuration, you can select a zone (Zone2 or Zone3) to be assigned to the
EXTRA SP 1–2 jacks in “Power Amp Assign” (p.133) in the “Setup” menu. By default, Zone2 is assigned to
the EXTRA SP 1 jacks and Zone3 is assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks. The following explanation is based
on the assumption that you have not changed the default zone assignments.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
❑ 7ch BI-AMP

❑ 7ch BI-AMP +1ZONE
Bi-amp

Bi-amp

2
3

5
6

Zone3

Main zone

Speaker

Connect to

Speaker

Connect to

FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

(not used)

SUBWOOFER 1–2

Zone3 speakers

EXTRA SP 2

• When Zone3 output is enabled (p.108), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
❑ 7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP (RX-A3050 only)

❑ 9ch +RP (RX-A3050 only)

Bi-amp

R
1

2
3

Speaker

Y
6

2
3

T
via
external amp

E
via external amp

via external amp

T
via
external amp

via
external amp

Connect to

Y
6

Speaker

Connect to

FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

EXTRA SP 1

R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

SUBWOOFER 1–2

• When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting
external amplifiers for Zone2 and Zone3 (p.105).

via
external amp

• When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an
external amplifier for Zone3 (p.105).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
❑ 9ch +FRONT (RX-A3050 only)

❑ 7ch +FP+RP (RX-A3050 only)

via external amp

R
via external amp

via external amp

2
3

Speaker

Y
6

T
via
external amp

Connect to

Y
6

Speaker

Connect to

FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP 1

F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

EXTRA SP 2

R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

SUBWOOFER 1–2

• When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an
external amplifier for Zone3 (p.105).

via
external amp

• When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting
external amplifiers for Zone2 and Zone3 (p.105).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
❑ 7ch +FRONT+1ZONE

❑ 5ch +FRONT+2ZONE

via external amp

R
1

5
6

2
9

5
6

Zone2

7
1

Zone3

Main zone

Zone3

Speaker

Connect to

Speaker

Connect to

FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP 1

(not used)

SUBWOOFER 1–2

Zone3 speakers

EXTRA SP 2

Zone2 speakers

EXTRA SP 1

Zone3 speakers

EXTRA SP 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
❑ 7ch +1ZONE

❑ 9ch +1ZONE

E
1
9

2
9

5
6

7
Zone3

Zone2

Main zone

Speaker

5
6

Main zone

Connect to

Speaker

Connect to

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

(not used)

EXTRA SP 1

(not used)

SUBWOOFER 1–2

Zone2 speakers

EXTRA SP 1

Zone3 speakers

EXTRA SP 2

• When Zone3 output is enabled (p.108), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
❑ 7ch +2ZONE

1
9

2
9

5
6

Zone2

7
1

Main zone
Zone3

Speaker

Connect to

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

(not used)

SUBWOOFER 1–2

Zone2 speakers

EXTRA SP 1

Zone3 speakers

EXTRA SP 2

• When Zone3 output is enabled (p.108), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

■ Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections

■ Connecting Zone2/3 speakers

When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the
FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP 1 terminals.

When using Zone2/3 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP 1–2 terminals.
To utilize the EXTRA SP 1–2 terminals for Zone2/3 speakers, configure the “Power Amp
Assign” setting in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall
outlet (p.50).

To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the “Setup”
menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet (p.50).
The unit (rear)

The unit (rear)
SPEAKERS

SPEAKERS

SURROUND BACK

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP2

CENTER

FRONT

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F. PRESENCE/BI-AMP
EXTRA SP1

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP2

CENTER

FRONT

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F. PRESENCE/BI-AMP
EXTRA SP1

SINGLE

Zone2

5
1

Main zone

Zone3
• The FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP 1 terminals output the same signals.

Caution

• You can select a zone (Zone2 or Zone3) to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1–2 jacks in “Power Amp Assign”
(p.133) in the “Setup” menu. By default, Zone2 is assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks and Zone3 is
assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks.

• Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a
tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp
connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker
cables.

• You can also connect Zone2 and Zone3 speakers using an external amplifier (p.105).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

■ Connecting an external power amplifier

(Example)
Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier

When connecting an external power amplifier to enhance speaker output, connect the
input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit. The same channel
signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their corresponding SPEAKERS
terminals.

PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
AV 2

AV 3

NETWORK

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

( 3 NET )

WIRELESS

AV 7

Main input jack
R OUT/
OUT

Caution

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

TRIGGER
OUT

REMOTE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making
connections.

AV 1

PRE OUT

MAIN IN

OUT

PR Y
(SINGLE)

RS-232C

AV 3

(FRONT)

– Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.
3/
ENCE

– When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

(REAR)

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

SPEAKERS

ROUND

SURROUND BACK

– When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume of
the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the unit) to
the pre-main amplifier.

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP2

CENTER

FRONT

R
FRONT

ZONE

SUR

Amplifier with
volume control
bypass
(such as A-S3000)

SINGLE

The unit (rear)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

NETWORK

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

( 3 NET )

WIRELESS

AV 7

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

AC IN

AV 2

)

AV 3

AV 4

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

TRIGGER
OUT

REMOTE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

RS-232C

OUT

2
A

AV 1

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

PR Y

AV 3

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

SUR. BACK

SUBWOOFER

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F. PRESENCE R. PRESENCE

FRONT

SURROUND

(REAR)

CENTER

SPEAKERS

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP2

CENTER

FRONT

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F. PRESENCE/BI-AMP
EXTRA SP1

NNA
IO)

SINGLE

1 23 45

The unit (rear)

1 F.PRESENCE jacks (RX-A3050 only)
Output front presence channel audio signals or Zone2 audio signals depending on the “Power
Amp Assign” setting (p.133).

About external power amplifiers
We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions.

2 R.PRESENCE jacks (RX-A3050 only)

• With unbalanced inputs

Output rear presence channel audio signals or Zone3 audio signals depending on the “Power
Amp Assign” setting (p.133).

• With volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit)

3 FRONT jacks

• Output power: 100 W or more (6 to 8 )

Output front channel sounds.

4 SURROUND jacks
Output surround channel sounds.

5 SUR. BACK jacks
Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one surround back speaker, connect
the external amplifier to the SINGLE jack (L side).

6 CENTER jack
Outputs center channel sounds.
En

Input/output jacks and cables
■ Video/audio jacks

■ Video jacks

■ Audio jacks

❑ HDMI jacks

❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

❑ OPTICAL jacks

Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single
jack. Use an HDMI cable.

Transmit video signals separated into three
components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB),
and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video
cable with three plugs.

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical
cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before
using the cable.

AV 1

HDMI cable

Digital optical cable
Component video cable

• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using
a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality
degradation.

• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return
Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission
features.
• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos.

AV 1

PR
PB

❑ COAXIAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial
cable.

❑ VIDEO jacks
Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.

Digital coaxial cable
AV 1

Video pin cable

❑ AUDIO jacks
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin
cable (RCA cable).

Stereo pin cable

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

2 Connecting a TV
Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.

To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For
details on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.182).

You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.
To maximize the performance of the unit, we recommend connecting a TV with an HDMI
cable.

About Audio Return Channel (ARC)

■ HDMI connection

• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.

• ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a
single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or
stereo pin cable).

• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.41).

HDMI OUT jack
HDMI OUT

The unit
(rear)

(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

ARC

HDMI

HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1

AV 2

HDMI input

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

AV 3

AV 4

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

HDMI
PHONO

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

AUDIO 1

HDMI

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

(2 TV)
R

GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F. PRESENCE R. PRESENCE

6 OPTICAL

SURROUND

AUDIO
FRONT

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

75Ω

1 OPTICAL

OPTICAL
O

AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks

Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)

• You do not make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases:
– If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC)
– If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box
• If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s
power and volume with the TV’s remote control.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

■ Component/composite video connection

❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)

When connecting any video device with a component video cable, connect the TV to
the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks.

MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack

The unit (rear)

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

When connecting any video device with a video pin cable, connect the TV to the
MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack.

Video input (composite video)

HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

AV 4

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

V
PHONO

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

AUDIO 1

• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be
output to the TV.

AV 1

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

(2 TV)

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.

AUDIO
GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F. PRESENCE R. PRESENCE

6 OPTICAL

SURROUND

FRONT

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

75Ω

• If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box, you do not need to make an audio cable
connection between the TV and the unit.

TV
1 OPTICAL

❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)

OPTICAL
O

MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks

AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO)
jacks

The unit (rear)
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

(HDCP2.2)

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

AV 3

AV 4

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

Video input
(component video)

AUDIO 1

HONO

HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT
2

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

PR Y

PRE OUT

(SINGLE)

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

SUB

COMPONENT VIDEO
GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F. PRESENCE R. PRESENCE

SURROUND

FRONT

(

SURROUND

(4 RADIO)

ANTENNA
75Ω

AUDIO 1
(2 TV)

AUDIO
L
L

1 OPTICAL

OPTICAL
O

AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks

Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

■ Connecting another TV or a projector

HDMI

The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit
with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching
videos with the remote control (p.72).

HDMI OUT 2 jack
HDMI OUT

The unit
(rear)

(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

ARC

TV
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

PHONO

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

AV 3

AV 1

AV 4

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

HDMI

GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F. PRESENCE R. PRESENCE

SURROUND

HDMI input

FRONT

HDMI

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

75Ω

Projector
TV (already connected)

• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.
• If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”, you can connect a video
monitor for Zone2 or Zone4 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor
(p.106).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

3 Connecting playback devices
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)

The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow
you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect
an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.

Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game
consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video
device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI
connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.

• Connecting an iPod (p.87)
• Connecting a USB storage device (p.90)

• Videos input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to the unit with a cable other than
HDMI. For details, refer to “Video signal flow” (p.180).
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”
setting (p.150) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A , B , C ),
COAXIAL (c, d, e) and OPTICAL (a, b, f) jacks to another input source.

• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit
will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.119) in the “Option” menu.

■ HDMI connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
The unit (rear)

HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks
HDMI (HDCP2.2)

I OUT

CP2.2)

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AV 7

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

AV 4

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

TRIGGER
OUT

REMOTE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

OUT

HDMI output

2
A

AV 1

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

PR Y

AV 3

PRE OUT

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

SUBWOOFER

HDMI

HDMI
2

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F. PRESENCE R. PRESENCE

FRONT

(REAR)

HDMI

CENTER

SPEAKERS

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP2

CENTER

SINGLE

Video device

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–7 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

■ Component video connection

■ Composite video connection

Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable
(digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the
unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital
coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)
depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

Output jacks on video device

Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit

Video

Input jacks on the unit

Audio

Video

Digital coaxial

AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Digital optical

AV 3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo

AV 1–3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO)

Component video

Audio

Composite video

AV 1–3
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
Y

(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 3 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo

AV 1–4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)

AV 1
(1 BD/DVD

ARC

AV 3

AV 1–4 (VIDEO)
jacks

AV 4

Video output
(composite video)

HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT
2

AV 1–2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Digital optical

The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT

The unit (rear)

Digital coaxial

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

PHONO

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

AV 3

AV 1

AV 4

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

TRIGG
OUT

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

V
ZONE OU

AUDIO 3

Video output
(component video)

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 1

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

PHONO

(2 TV)

AV 1

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

PR Y
(SINGLE)

AV 3

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F. PRESENCE R. PRESENCE

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

(REAR)

SUBWOOFER

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

ZONE 2/
F. PRESENCE

6 OPTICAL

SURROUND BACK

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

75Ω

CENTER

SPEAKERS

SURROUND

2 OPTICAL

PR
2 OPTICAL

1 OPTICAL

GND

(FRONT)

GND

VIDEO

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.P

EXTRA SP2

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

75Ω

COAXIAL

Video device

SINGLE

COAXIAL

Video device

L
L

Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3 (OPTICAL),
AV 1–3 (AUDIO) jacks

L
OPTICAL

OPTICAL

Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3 (OPTICAL),
AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks

Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–3 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)

PHONO jacks

Audio output
(PHONO)

PHONO

Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit.
Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the
following connections.

PHONO
L

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”
setting (p.150) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (c, d, e) and OPTICAL
(a, b, f) jacks to another input source.

Ground lead

GND

HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

PHONO

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

Audio output jacks on the unit

Digital coaxial

AV 1–2 (COAXIAL)
AUDIO 3 (COAXIAL)
AV 3 (OPTICAL)
AUDIO 1–2 (OPTICAL)

Analog stereo

AV 1–4 (AUDIO)
AUDIO 1–3 (AUDIO)

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

Turntable

AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F. PRESENCE R. PRESENCE

6 OPTICAL

SURROUND

FRONT

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

75Ω

Digital optical

AV 2

AV 4

Audio output jacks on audio device

AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

AV 3

C
COAXIAL

Turntable (PHONO)

The unit
(rear)

PHONO

Audio device

L
L

OPTICAL

Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3
(COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO) jacks

Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3 or PHONO on the remote
control, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit.
When connecting a turntable
• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a
low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.
• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel

❑ Composite video/analog stereo connection

Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit.

Connect a playback device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with a
video pin cable and a stereo pin cable.

Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see
“Connecting an iPod” (p.87) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.90).

ENTER
ZONE 2
RETURN

Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on
the unit.

Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the
unit with an HDMI cable.
ZONE 3

ZONE 4

ZONE CONTROL

VIDEO AUX

YPAO MIC

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

ZONE 2

ZONE 4

PHONES

❑ HDMI connection

RETURN

ZONE 3

DISPLAY

AUDIO

HDMI IN

The unit (front)

ZONE CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO AUX

PHONES

YPAO MIC

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

AUDIO

HDMI IN

HDMI

Game console

The unit (front)

Game console

Camcorder

If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played
back on the device will be output from the unit.

Camcorder

• If you connect video devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO/AUDIO)
jacks, the unit outputs video/audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack.

If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control, the
video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.

• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT
jack of the unit (p.39).
• You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device.
• The VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack does not support HDCP 2.2.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

Assembling the AM antenna

Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
FM antenna
AM antenna

HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AV 7

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

AV 3

AV 4

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

TRIGGER
OUT

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

PHONO

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

AV 1

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

PR Y
(SINGLE)

AV 3

(FRONT)

GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F. PRESENCE R. PRESENCE

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

(REAR)

SUBWOOFER

Connecting the AM antenna

CENTER

SPEAKERS

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP2

Hold down

Insert

Release

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

75Ω

SINGLE

The unit (rear)

• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

5 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna
Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless antenna for establishing a wireless network connection.
You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.

Connecting the network cable

Preparing the wireless antenna

Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5
or higher straight cable).

If you want to establish a wireless network connection, stand the wireless antenna up
straight.

Internet

For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see
“Connecting to a network device wirelessly” (p.63).

Network Attached Storage
(NAS)
WAN

LAN

Modem
PC
Network cable

ESS
WIREL

The unit (rear)
Router
NETWORK
AV 6

( 3 NET )

WIRELESS

AV 7

AC IN

Mobile device
(such as iPod touch
and iPhone)

TRIGGER
OUT
1
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

REMOTE
IN

RS-232C

OUT

• Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it.

• If you want to use a wired (network cable) connection when a wireless connection has been made, set
“Network Connection” (p.144) in the “Setup” menu to “Wired”.
• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,
as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to
configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network
parameters manually (p.145).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Network” (p.155) in the “Information” menu.

• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)
may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the
security software or firewall settings appropriately.
• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

6 Connecting other devices

7 Connecting the power cable
Before connecting the power cable (General model only)

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function

Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage.
Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.

The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the
unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that
supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the
trigger function by connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks
with a monaural mini-plug cable.

The unit (rear)

TRIGGER OUT
1–2 jacks

Trigger In
(+12V)

• Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC
wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a
potential fire hazard.

The unit (rear)

Power amplifier
(such as MX-A5000)

NETWORK

TRIGGER
OUT
DMI (HDCP2.2)

NETWORK

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 7

WIRELESS

AC IN

GGER
OUT

( 3 NET )

WIRELESS

REMOTE
.1A
TAL

RS-232C

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

OUT

REMOTE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

OUT

RS-232C

110V120V

2
C

PR Y
(SINGLE)

AV 3

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

220V240V

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

TRIGGER
OUT

( 3 NET )

AV 7

(FRONT)

ERS

R.PRESENCE

CENTER

SP2

FRONT

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F. PRESENCE/BI-AMP
EXTRA SP1

SUR. BACK

(REAR)

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

SPEAKERS

SURROUND BACK

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP2

CENTER

FRONT

SINGLE

System
connector
jack

Yamaha
subwoofer

After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit
and then to an AC wall outlet.
The unit (rear)

• You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.151) in the
“Setup” menu.

NETWORK

( 3 NET )

WIRELESS

AC IN

OTE

RS-232C

OUT

CENTER

To an AC wall outlet

FRONT

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F. PRESENCE/BI-AMP
EXTRA SP1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

RECEIVER

SOURCE

RECEIVER z

8 Selecting an on-screen menu language

V-AUX

Select the desired on-screen menu language from English,
Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese.

AUDIO

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN 2 3 4

1
2

ZONE
SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

• If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
ON SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit.

VOLUME

ON
SCREEN

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

DISPLAY

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

3
4

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and
the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired
language.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.

BAND
MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

6
7

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

RECEIVER

SOURCE

RECEIVER z

9 Configuring the necessary speaker settings

V-AUX

If you use any of the following speaker configurations, follow the
procedure below to configure the corresponding speaker settings
manually before performing YPAO.

AUDIO

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN 2 3 4

When using any of advanced speaker configurations

• Advanced speaker configuration (p.28)

a Use the cursor keys to select “Power Amp Assign” (p.133) and
press ENTER.

• Using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual
CINEMA FRONT) (p.23)

ZONE

b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select your speaker system and
press ENTER.

SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

• Using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos playback (p.24)

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

ON SCREEN

1
2

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

When using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel
system (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

a Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Configuration” 
“Layout”  “Surround” (p.134).

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Front” and press ENTER.

When using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos
playback

• If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.

a Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Configuration” 
“Layout”  “Front Presence” (p.135).

BAND
MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

MEMORY
10

ENT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH

3
4
5

Configure the corresponding speaker settings.

Press ON SCREEN.

b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select your front presence
speaker layout and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Speaker”
and then “Manual Setup”.

CODE SET

c If you are using the rear presence speakers, also select its
layout in “Rear Presence”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

RECEIVER

SOURCE

RECEIVER z

10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

V-AUX

The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to
your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the
speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic
parameters, to suit your room.

AUDIO

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN 2 3 4

Place the YPAO microphone at your listening
position and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the
front panel.

ZONE
SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

• The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)
technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically
designed for acoustic perfection.

YPAO MIC
jack

VOLUME

– Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children.

OPTION

– Test tone volume cannot be adjusted.
ENTER

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

RETURN

– Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not
become an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone.

R
1

– Do not connect headphones.

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

– Keep the room as quiet as possible.

RETURN

The unit (front)

YPAO MIC

• Note the following regarding YPAO measurement.

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

• Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your
ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can
use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone.

1
2

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit.

YPAO
5
microphone

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH

• If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.

CODE SET

Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If
the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to
maximum.
VOLUME

MIN

MAX

CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT

MIN

MAX

Ear height

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
The following screen appears on the TV.
RECEIVER

SOURCE

RECEIVER
AV

V-AUX

AUDIO

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN 2 3 4

ZONE
SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

VOLUME

• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting
the measurement.

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

If desired, select the measuring options.
a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” (p.53) or
“Angle/Height” (p.54) (RX-A3050 only) and press ENTER.
b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.

BAND
MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

MEMORY
10

ENT

• If the cursor keys do not work, the remote control may be set to operate
external devices. In this case, press RECEIVER and then use the cursor
keys.

This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the
measurement.

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:

TV CH
CODE SET

“Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.57)
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:
“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.54)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
❑ Multi Position
Single measure

Selects multi measure or single measure.

Multi measure
(5 listening positions)

e
bac

Settings

Yes

Select this option if you will have several listening positions or if you
want others to enjoy surround sound. You can take measurements at up
to 8 different positions in the room. The speaker settings will be
optimized to suit the area defined by those positions (multi measure).

No (default)

Select this option if your listening position will always be fixed. Take the
measurements at only one position. The speaker settings will be
optimized to suit that position (single measure).

Multi measure
Multi measure
(1 listening position + front/back/left/right) (2 listening positions + front/back)

b
c a e
d

• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to enjoy surround sound in
a wider space.
• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening position you will be
seated most frequently.

c
a b
d

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
❑ Angle/Height

RECEIVER

SOURCE

Measuring at one listening position
(single measure)

(RX-A3050 only)

V-AUX

Enables/disables the angle/height measurement.
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for
measurement. It takes about 5 minutes to perform the
measurement.

AUDIO

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN 2 3 4

ZONE

• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,
see “Error messages” (p.61) or “Warning messages” (p.62).

SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

• (RX-A3050 only)
Do not use the microphone base until the corresponding message appear on the
TV.

VOLUME

Settings
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

Yes

Enables the angle/height measurement. The unit will
measure angle of each speaker and height of the
presence speakers at the listening position, and correct
the speaker parameters so that CINEMA DSP can create
more effective sound fields.

No (default)

Disables the angle/height measurement.

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement finishes.

MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

(RX-A2050)
(RX-A3050 [when angle/height measurement is disabled])

Proceed to Step 3.

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.

• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Measure” and press ENTER.

TV CH
CODE SET

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
(RX-A3050 [when angle/height measurement is enabled])
RECEIVER

SOURCE

Proceed to Step 2.

c Place the microphone base at the listening position and set the
YPAO microphone to the position “1”.

V-AUX

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

AUDIO

MAIN 2 3 4

ZONE
SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

Microphone base

VOLUME

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

Select “NO” to cancel the angle/height measurement.
Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Perform the angle/height measurement.
a Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER.

POP-UP/MENU

b Attach the supplied pole to the center of the microphone base.
Pole

BAND
MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.
Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

MEMORY
10

ENT

• Do not move the microphone base until the fourth angle measurement
finishes.

d Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.

Microphone base

The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle
measurement finishes.

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

e In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the
positions “2” and “3”.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
f Set the YPAO microphone at the top of the pole and perform the
fourth angle measurement.

RECEIVER

SOURCE

• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.

V-AUX

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

AUDIO

MAIN 2 3 4

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO”
to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.

ZONE
SCENE

The following screen appears on the TV when the fourth angle
measurement finishes.
MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are
automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy
natural sounds even at low volume.

DISPLAY
BAND

• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.116) in the
“Option” menu.

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

MEMORY
10

ENT

Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.

MUTE

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Caution

• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.60).

INPUT
TV VOL

TV CH
CODE SET

To save the measurement results, use the cursor
keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
En

• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Measuring at multiple listening positions
(multi measure)

RECEIVER

SOURCE

V-AUX

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for
measurement. It takes about 15 minutes to measure 8 listening
positions.

AUDIO

When the measurements at the positions you want
to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to
select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.
When you have taken measurements at 8 listening
positions, the following screen appears automatically.
(RX-A2050)

MAIN 2 3 4

ZONE

• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,
see “Error messages” (p.61) or “Warning messages” (p.62).

SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

• (RX-A3050 only)
Do not use the microphone base until the corresponding message appear on the
TV.

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

(RX-A3050 [when angle/height measurement is disabled])

Proceed to Step 5.

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Measure” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

BAND
MODE

TUNING

• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.

PRESET

The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement at the first position finishes.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

MEMORY
10

ENT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening
position and press ENTER.
Repeat Step 2 until measurements at all listening positions
(up to 8) have been taken.

(RX-A3050 [when angle/height measurement is enabled])

Proceed to Step 4.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

RECEIVER

SOURCE

a Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER.

V-AUX

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

d Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.

Perform the angle/height measurement.

The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle
measurement finishes.

Select “NO” to cancel the angle/height measurement.

AUDIO

b Attach the supplied pole to the center of the microphone base.
Pole

MAIN 2 3 4

ZONE
SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

VOLUME

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

e In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the
positions “2” and “3”.

Microphone base

POP-UP/MENU

c Place the microphone base at the listening position you will be
seated most frequently and set the YPAO microphone to the
position “1”.

f Set the YPAO microphone at the top of the pole and perform the
fourth angle measurement.

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Microphone base

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.
Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.
• Do not move the microphone base until the fourth angle measurement
finishes.

The following screen appears on the TV when the fourth angle
measurement finishes.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

RECEIVER

SOURCE

V-AUX

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO”
to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.

AUDIO

MAIN 2 3 4

• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.60).

ZONE
SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

To save the measurement result, use the cursor
keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are
automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy
natural sounds even at low volume.

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.116) in the
“Option” menu.

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

PRESET

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.

Caution
3

• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Checking the measurement results

RECEIVER

SOURCE

(RX-A3050 only)
Angle
(Horizontal) Horizontal angle of each speaker at the listening position

V-AUX

You can check the YPAO measurement results.

AUDIO

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN 2 3 4

• You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.130) in the “Setup” menu,
which displays the previous measurement results.

SCENE

After the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Result” and press ENTER.

ZONE

Height

MUTE

TOP MENU

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

ON SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

BAND
MODE

TUNING

PRESET

1 Measurement result items

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH

When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not
suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings
and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.

In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto
Setup”, and then “Result” (p.129).

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload‘” and
press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

2 Measurement result details

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

To finish checking the results and return to the
previous screen, press RETURN.

The following screen appears.
PROGRAM

(RX-A3050 only)
Height of the presence speakers above the level of the
listening position

3 The number of measured positions (when multi
measure is performed)

Use the cursor keys to select an item.

CODE SET

Wiring

Polarity of each speaker
Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the
reverse polarity (+/-).

Size

Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the
subwoofer)
Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively.
Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.

Distance

Distance from the listening position to each speaker

Level

Output level adjustment for each speaker

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.

Error message

Cause

Remedy

E-1: No Front SP

Front speakers are not detected.

E-2: No Sur. SP

One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.

E-3: No F.PRNS SP

One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected.

E-4: SBR → SBL

A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only.

When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the
on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker.

E-5: Noisy

The noise is too loud.

Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select
“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.

E-6: Check Sur.

Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround
speakers are connected.

Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen
instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers.

E-7: No MIC

The YPAO microphone has been removed.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again.

E-8: No Signal

The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service
center.

E-9: User Cancel

The measurement has been canceled.

Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.

E-10: Internal Error

An internal error has occurred.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact
the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

E-11: No R.PRNS SP

One of the rear presence speakers cannot be detected.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.

Warning message

Cause

Remedy

W-1: Out of Phase

A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity
(+/-).

Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.60) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by
“Reverse”.
If the speaker is connected incorrectly:
Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.
If the speaker is connected correctly:
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are
connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.

W-2: Over Distance

A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening
position.

Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.60) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m
(80 ft) of the listening position.

W-3: Level Error

There are significant volume differences between the
speakers.

Select “Level” in “Result” (p.60) and check the speaker identified by “Over ±10.0dB”, then check the usage
environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. We recommend
using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly
■ Connecting without a wireless router (access point)

Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a
wireless connection.

Connect a mobile device to the unit directly.
You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” to control the
unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit.

Selecting the connection method
Select a connection method according to your network environment.

■ Connecting with a wireless router (access point)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point).
You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS)
on the unit.

Mobile device
(such as iPhone)

Internet

The unit

For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
(Wireless Direct)” (p.70).

Wireless router

• You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.47) or the
wireless network connection (p.64).

Modem

• When Wireless Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available.
– Internet radio
– Network services
– Playback of music stored on media servers (PC/NAS)

Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
• For details on “AV CONTROLLER”, visit the Yamaha website.

The unit

For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.64).

• You cannot use the wireless network connection simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection
(p.47) or Wireless Direct (p.70).
• If the unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart, the unit may not connect to a wireless
router (access point). In such case, place them close to each other.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

RECEIVER

SOURCE

RECEIVER z

Connecting the unit to a wireless network

V-AUX

There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless
network.

PHONO

Select a connection method according to your environment.

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

AUDIO

MAIN 2 3 4

Do you own iOS devices
(iPhone/iPod touch)?

ZONE

Yes

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.

A (p.64)

SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

Does your wireless router
(access point) have a WPS
button?

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

No
Cursor keys
ENTER

RETURN

B (p.66)

ON SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

Yes

C (p.67)

• The checkmark indicates the current setting.

DISPLAY
BAND

■ A: Sharing the iOS device setting

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

MEMORY
10

ENT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

You can easily setup a wireless connection by applying the
connection settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPod touch).
Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a
wireless router.

1
2

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.

3
4

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

RECEIVER

SOURCE

V-AUX

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the
desired connection method and select “NEXT”.

❑ Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly
If you select “Wireless (WAC)” as the connection method, perform
the network setting sharing operation on your iOS device. (The
following procedure is a setup example for iOS 8.)

AUDIO

MAIN 2 3 4

On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay
speaker in the Wi-Fi screen.

ZONE
SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

The following connection methods are available.
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

Wireless (WAC)

You can apply the connection settings on the iOS device
to the unit using a wireless connection. For details, see
“Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly”.
(You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later.)

USB Cable

You can apply the connection settings on the iOS device
to the unit using a USB cable. For details, see “Sharing
the iOS device setting using a USB cable”.
(You need iOS device with iOS 5 or later.)

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

Check the network currently selected and tap
“Next”.
Tap here to start setup

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

The name of the unit

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

MEMORY
10

ENT

The network currently selected

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically
connected to the selected network (access point).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
❑ Sharing the iOS device setting using a USB cable

RECEIVER

SOURCE

RECEIVER z
AV

V-AUX

AUDIO

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN 2 3 4

If you select “USB Cable” as the connection method, follow the
procedure below to share the iOS device setting with the unit.

Connect the iOS device to the USB jack, and disable
the screen lock on the iOS device.
ZONE 2
RETURN

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

ZONE CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO AUX

PHONES

1
2

SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

YPAO MIC

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

AUDIO

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

Cursor keys
ENTER

RETURN

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “NEXT” and
press ENTER.

Tap “Allow” in the message appeared on the iOS
device.

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

MEMORY
10

ENT

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

INPUT
TV VOL

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3
seconds.
“Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front
display.

ON SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

MUTE

You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the
WPS button.

• This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router
(access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.

The unit (front)

ZONE

■ B: Using the WPS push button
configuration

TV CH
CODE SET

Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access
point).
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the front display.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try
another connection method.

About WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,
which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

RECEIVER

SOURCE

RECEIVER z
AV

V-AUX

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

AUDIO

MAIN 2 3 4

■ C: Using other connection methods
If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push
button configuration method, follow the procedure below to
configure the wireless network settings.

1
2

ZONE
SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

3
4

BAND

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.

INPUT
TV VOL

5
6
7

The following connection methods are available.

Press ON SCREEN.

DISPLAY

MODE

MUTE

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.

OPTION

RETURN

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the
desired connection method and select “NEXT”.

VOLUME

ON
SCREEN

WPS Button

You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS
button while viewing the TV screen. Follow the
instructions displayed on the TV screen.

Share Wi-Fi
Settings (iOS)

See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.64).

Access Point
Scan

You can set up a wireless connection by searching
for an access point. For details on settings, see
“Searching for an access point” (p.68).

Manual Setting

You can set up a wireless connection by entering
the required information (such as SSID)
manually. For details on settings, see “Setting up
the wireless connection manually” (p.68).

PIN Code

You can set up a wireless connection by entering
the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access
point). The method is available if the wireless
router (access point) supports the WPS PIN code
method. For details on settings, see “Using the PIN
code” (p.69).

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.

TV CH
CODE SET

• The checkmark indicates the current setting.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

RECEIVER

SOURCE

V-AUX

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

❑ Searching for an access point

❑ Setting up the wireless connection manually

If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the
unit starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of
available access points appears on the TV screen.

If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the
wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.

AUDIO

MAIN 2 3 4

SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of
the access point and select “NEXT”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
security method of the access point and select
“NEXT”.

The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.

ZONE

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the
desired access point and select “NEXT”.

You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method
and security key for your network.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key and select “NEXT”.

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

ON SCREEN

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try
another connection method.

TV CH
CODE SET

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Settings
None, WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

RECEIVER

SOURCE

V-AUX

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available.
Proceed to Step 4.

AUDIO

MAIN 2 3 4

If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character
string, or 64 hexadecimal digits.

SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

❑ Using the PIN code
If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of
available access points appears on the TV screen.

If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or
10 or 26 hexadecimal digits.

ZONE

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key and select “NEXT”.

The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen.

POP-UP/MENU

ON SCREEN

OPTION

RETURN

DISPLAY

If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try
another connection method.

BAND
MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER to start the connection process.

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

MEMORY
10

ENT

When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.

If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is
entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1.

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router
(access point).
For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the
wireless router (access point).

VOLUME

ON
SCREEN

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the
desired access point and select “NEXT”.

TV CH
CODE SET

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

RECEIVER

SOURCE

RECEIVER z
AV

V-AUX

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON SCREEN

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

• The checkmark indicates the current setting.

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
desired security method and select “NEXT”.

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

MEMORY
10

ENT

INPUT
TV VOL

3
4

Press ON SCREEN.

5
6

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.

MUTE

1
2

VOLUME

ON
SCREEN

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Wireless Direct” and select “OK”.

• Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not
strongly encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless
devices connected to the unit without permission.

ZONE

Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit
directly.

AUDIO

MAIN 2 3 4

Connecting a mobile device to the unit
directly (Wireless Direct)

TV CH
CODE SET

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.

Settings
None, WPA2-PSK (AES)

• If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the
communication is not encrypted.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

RECEIVER

SOURCE

V-AUX

If you select “None” in Step 8, this setting is not available.
Proceed to Step 10.

AUDIO

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN 2 3 4

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key and select “NEXT”.

Otherwise, either 8 to 63 character string, or 64
hexadecimal digits.

SCENE

For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the
instruction manual of the mobile device.
a Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device.
b Select the SSID displayed in Step 10 from the list of available
access points.
c When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key
displayed in Step 10.

ZONE

11 Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device.

12 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

ON SCREEN

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

10 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “OK” and press
ENTER to save the setting.

The settings made appear on the TV screen.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

The SSID and security key information is required for setup
of a mobile device.

PLAYBACK

RECEIVER

SOURCE

V-AUX

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

AUDIO

MAIN 2 3 4

Input selection keys

Basic playback procedure

1
HDMI OUT

ZONE
SCENE

VOLUME

MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

MUTE

VOLUME

Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.

Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.

ON SCREEN

For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.

Cursor keys
ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.81)

BAND
MODE

TUNING

MEMORY
10

ENT

• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.94)

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and
press ENTER.

Selecting an HDMI output jack

Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.
Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be
used for signal output changes.

HDMI¡OUT¡Sel.
¡¡¡OUT¡1+2

• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.90)

SLEEP

b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.

• Playing back iPod music (p.87)

MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INFO

a Press ON SCREEN.

• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.86)

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

On-screen input selection

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.

OPTION

ENTER

Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or
BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.

TV CH
CODE SET

OUT 1+2

VOLUME
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1
and HDMI OUT 2 jacks.

OUT 1
Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.

• Listening to Internet radio (p.98)

OUT 2

• Playing back music with AirPlay (p.101)

Off

Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.

Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.73).
• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or
TONE/BALANCE on the front panel (p.116).

• When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest
resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For
example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p
TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.)
• If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4 (p.149), you can turn on/off
each zone by pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly.

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)

RECEIVER

SOURCE

V-AUX

The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch.
You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source.

AUDIO

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN 2 3 4

ZONE
SCENE

SCENE

Press SCENE.
The input source and settings registered to the
corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on
automatically when it is in standby mode.

By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.
VOLUME

MUTE

PROGRAM

SCENE (SCENE key)
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

Input
Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

ON SCREEN

HDMI Output

Input (p.72)

AV 1

AUDIO 1

NET RADIO

TUNER

Audio Select (p.119)

Auto

—

HDMI Output (p.72)

OUT 1+2

DISPLAY
BAND

DSP Program (p.75)

Sci-Fi

STRAIGHT

9ch Stereo

Pure Direct Mode (p.139)

Auto

Enhancer (p.80)

Off

Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.118)

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

Mode

MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

• You can select SCENE 1–4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control.
Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5–12) and select those scenes
from the “Scene” menu (p.123).

On-screen scene selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press
ENTER.

SOURCE
RECEIVER

SOURCE

Configuring scene assignments

Selecting setting items to be included as
scene assignments

V-AUX

AUDIO

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN 2 3 4

Set the unit to the condition (such as input source
and sound program) that you want to assign to a
scene.

Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET
Complete” appears on the front display.

Input selection keys

ZONE
SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

SCENE

¡¡¡¡SCENE1
¡Set¡Complete

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

If you want to control the corresponding playback
device after selecting the scene, hold down the
corresponding SCENE key and input selection key
together for more than 3 seconds.

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

Once the setting is completed successfully, SOURCE blinks twice.

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

MEMORY
10

ENT

• If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see
“Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.161) to register it.
• The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external
device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify
the device type in “Device Control” (p.124) in the “Scene” menu.

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output
and Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the
scene assignments in “Detail” (p.124) in the “Scene” menu.
Sound

Tone Control, YPAO Volume, Adaptive DRC,
Extra Bass

Surround

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue
Level, Subwoofer Trim

Video

Video Mode, Video Adjustment

Volume

Master Volume

Lipsync

Lipsync, Delay

Speaker Setup

Setting Pattern, PEQ Select

Selecting the sound mode

RECEIVER

SOURCE

V-AUX

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and
surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with
your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo
playback).

AUDIO

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN 2 3 4

❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies

ZONE

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

PROGRAM

ON SCREEN

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MUSIC

SLEEP

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

MEMORY
10

ENT

• Press MUSIC repeatedly.

• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.14) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in
the “Information” menu (p.154).

This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening
music sources or stereo playback (p.77).

TV VOL

• Dolby Atmos contents are decoded as Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus or
multichannel PCM format in the following situations.

• Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from
2-channel sources (p.79).

❑ Switching to the straight decode mode

TV CH
CODE SET

• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.

About Dolby Atmos®

• Press STRAIGHT.

INPUT
MUTE

MOVIE
MUSIC
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
PURE DIRECT

• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing
PROGRAM.
• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in
the “DSP Program” menu (p.126).

❑ Selecting a surround decoder

BAND
MODE

INFO

c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround
decoder and press ENTER.

❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or
stereo playback

DISPLAY

MOVIE

b Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.

This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing
video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.76).
PROGRAM

a Press ON SCREEN.

• Press MOVIE repeatedly.

SCENE

On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection

This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels
(p.79).

❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode
• Press PURE DIRECT.
This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the
electrical noise from other circuitry (p.80).

❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer
• Press ENHANCER.
This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth
and breadth (p.80).

– Any of CINEMA DSP programs is selected.
– Neither surround back nor presence speakers are used.
– Headphones are used (2-channel playback).
• When the Dolby Atmos decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such
as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.78), YPAO Volume (p.116) or Compressed
Music Enhancer (p.80) does not work.

■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields
(CINEMA DSP HD3/CINEMA DSP 3D)

The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as
movies, TV programs, and games.

❑ MOVIE THEATER
* CINEMA DSP

HD3:

RX-A3050, CINEMA DSP 3D: RX-A2050

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP

Standard

This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling
without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,
such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the
ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful
reverberations from the left, right, and rear.

Spectacle

This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie
productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the
cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing
everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.

Sci-Fi

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the
latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically
created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue,
sound effects, and background music.

Adventure

This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and
adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but
puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,
powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth
creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of
the sounds and the separation of the channels.

Drama

This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of
movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and
background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge
on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long
periods.

Mono Movie

This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,
in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a
pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate
reverberation to the original audio.

technology (CINEMA DSP HD3/CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound
fields like actual movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural
stereoscopic sound fields.
Sound program category

¡¡MUSIC
HD 3

¡¡CLASSICAL
Hall¡in¡Vienna

VIRTUAL
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1
SR

Sound program
“CINEMA DSP !” (RX-A3050) or “CINEMA DSP n” (RX-A2050) lights up

• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.140) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”.
• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to
produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we
recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and
rear presence speakers for further spatial sounds).
• If a multichannel source (6.1 channels or more) is input when no surround back speakers are connected,
the unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of
depth to the rear sound field.
• When VPS or VSBS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
• (RX-A3050 only)
The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to
produce natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected but no rear
presence speakers.

■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)

❑ ENTERTAINMENT

Sports

This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts
and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’
voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the
stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of
the fans in a suitable space.

Action Game

This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting
games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player
feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater
concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.

Roleplaying Game

This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This
program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction
of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of
scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer
for a clearer and more spatial sound field.

Music Video

This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as
if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere
thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound
field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound
field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.

Recital/Opera

This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and
emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices to offer the reverberations
of an orchestra box in front the listener at the same time as providing the
acoustic positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround
sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are
used to represent the inherent beauty of music. The listener will not be
fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment.

The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
You can also select stereo playback.

❑ CLASSICAL

Hall in Munich

This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500
seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful
reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s
virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.

Hall in Vienna

This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a
shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings
create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,
producing a very full, rich sound.

Hall in Amsterdam

The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2,200 around the circle stage.
Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.

Church in Freiburg

Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a
pointed tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the
high ceiling enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial
reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself
reproduces the atmosphere of the church.

Church in
Royaumont

This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall)
of a beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the
outskirts of Paris.

Chamber

This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an
audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable
for courtly music and chamber music.

■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)

❑ LIVE/CLUB
Village Vanguard

The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low
ceiling makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in
the center.

Warehouse Loft

The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the
concrete walls clearly with a lot of energy.

Cellar Club

This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and
homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that
make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage.

The Roxy Theatre

This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert
venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the
hall.

The Bottom Line

This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a
famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left
and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo) when no
surround speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround
technology to reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the
well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using
presence speakers in order to enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field.

• When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.

■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front
(Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your
room, you can place them in the front (p.23) and enjoy multichannel surround sound
using Virtual CINEMA FRONT.

❑ STEREO
2ch Stereo

Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and
output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).

9ch Stereo

Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and
then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.

When “Layout (Surround)” (p.136) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates
the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel
surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front.

• When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.

■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
• CINEMA DSP HD3/CINEMA DSP 3D (p.76) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.78) do not work when “2ch
Stereo” or “9ch Stereo” is selected.

You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with
stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting
a sound program or a surround decoder.

Enjoying unprocessed playback

RECEIVER

SOURCE

V-AUX

You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
processing.

AUDIO

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN 2 3 4

■ Playing back in original channels
(straight decode)

ZONE

When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces
stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as
CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for
multichannel sources.

SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

Press STRAIGHT.
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is
enabled or disabled.

OPTION

ENTER

¡
RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

¡¡¡STRAIGHT
¡

The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel
playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources.

• Speakers that produce sounds will change depending on your speaker system
and the selected decode type (p.127).
• For details on each decoder, see “Glossary” (p.175).

Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder
changes.
¡

¡SUR.¡DECODE
¡†‡PLƒx¡MOVIE

VOLUME
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

bSurround

MODE

TUNING

■ Playing back 2-channel sources in
multichannel (surround decoder)

SUR.DECODE

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

MEMORY
10

ENT

• To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround
back speakers are used, select a surround decoder (p.79).

bPLIIx Movie

• If “Layout (Surround)” (p.136) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual
CINEMA FRONT (p.78) works when multichannel source is played back.

bPLII Movie
bPLIIx Music

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH

bPLII Music

CODE SET

bPLIIx Game
bPLII Game

VOLUME
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

Use the Dolby Surround decoder suitable for all
sources. A real acoustic space (including
overhead) will be created especially when
object-based audio (such as Dolby Atmos content)
is played.
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will
be output from the surround/surround back
speakers even when 2-channel source is input.
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will
be output from the surround/surround back
speakers even when 2-channel source is input.
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for games. Sounds will
be output from the surround/surround back
speakers even when 2-channel source is input.

Neo:6 Cinema

Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be
output from the surround/surround back speakers.

Neo:6 Music

Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be output
from the surround/surround back speakers.

RECEIVER

SOURCE

• You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are
connected or when “Surround Back” (p.135) in the “Setup” menu is set to
“None”.

V-AUX

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

• When the Dolby Surround decoder is selected, virtual surround processing
(such as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.78), YPAO Volume (p.116) or
Compressed Music Enhancer (p.80) does not work.

AUDIO

MAIN 2 3 4

• If the Dolby Surround decoder is selected when only one surround back
speaker is used, no sound is output from the surround back speaker (except
when a Dolby Atmos content is played).

ZONE
SCENE

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)
MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

VOLUME

When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the
selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the
electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It
allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET

Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the
sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original
sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along
with any other sound modes.
In addition, Compressed Music Enhancer enhances the quality of
uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC)
when “Hi-Res Mode” (p.118) in the “Option” menu is set to “On”
(default).

Press ENHANCER.
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer
is enabled or disabled.

Press PURE DIRECT.
Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is
enabled or disabled.

BAND
MODE

TUNING

Enjoying compressed music with enhanced
sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)

¡
ENHANCER

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

PURE DIRECT
3

MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

VOLUME
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

VOLUME

“ENHANCER” lights up

FPL L
R FPR
SW1 SW SW2
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available.

INPUT
TV VOL

ENHANCER

¡PURE DIRECT
¡

¡Enhancer On
¡

• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling
rate is over 48 kHz.

– Some settings for the speakers or sound programs
– Operating the on-screen menu and some items in the “Option” menu
– Using the multi-zone function
– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)

• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.118) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.

Listening to FM/AM radio
Setting the frequency steps

You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered
radio stations.

(Asia and General models only)
At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz for AM.
Depending on your country or region, set the frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10
kHz for AM.

• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. The
explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used in U.K. and Europe models.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas.

1
2

Set the unit to standby mode.
When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel,
press MAIN ZONE z.
MAIN ZONE z

STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ STEP”.
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
SLEEP

HD 3

4
5

TUNERFRQSTEP
FM50/AM9

Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on
again.

RECEIVER

SOURCE

Selecting a frequency for reception

Registering favorite radio stations (presets)

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.

You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.

Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).

V-AUX

AUDIO

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN 2 3 4

TUNER

ZONE

DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
SLEEP

SCENE

FM87.50MHz

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

■ Registering a radio station
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.

Use the following keys to set a frequency.
TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the
key for about a second to search stations automatically.

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR

HD 3

PROGRAM

• You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using
“Auto Preset” (p.85).

OPTION

Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to
select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

STEREO TUNED

¡
¡

FM 98.50MHz

VOLUME
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

TUNING
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

MEMORY
10

ENT

Numeric keys
MEMORY

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio
station.
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.

Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.82)
to tune into the desired radio station.

Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected
radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.
Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered
to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most
recently registered number.
Preset number

¡Preset

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of
reception range.

• You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM
radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.119) in the “Option” menu. When the signal
reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may
improve it.

STEREO TUNED

“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered

STEREO TUNED

VOLUME
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning
into the desired radio station, use PRESET or numeric keys to select a
preset number, and then press MEMORY again.

¡Preset

01:FM 98.50MHz
¡ Preset OK

02:Empty
¡ FM 98.50MHz

VOLUME
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

■ Selecting a preset station

RECEIVER

SOURCE

V-AUX

AUDIO

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN 2 3 4

SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.

Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.

TUNER

ZONE

You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by
using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.

¡Preset

VOLUME

STEREO TUNED

TOP MENU

Radio Data System tuning

Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

01:FM 98.50MHz
¡

Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM
stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of
Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program
Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio
Data System broadcasting station.

■ Displaying the Radio Data System information

1
VOLUME

Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.

FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System
broadcasting stations (p.85).

OPTION

• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.

ENTER

• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
RETURN

DISPLAY

• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.

BAND
MODE

TUNING

Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

PRESET

PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

(U.K. and Europe models only)

• To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.85).

MUSIC

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO

MEMORY
10

ENT

STEREO TUNED

INFO

SLEEP

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.

MUTE

VOLUME
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

Item name

Numeric keys

INPUT
TV VOL

Info
¡Program Type

TV CH
CODE SET

Frequency (always displayed)

¡
STEREO TUNED

FM 98.50MHz
CLASSICS
Information

VOLUME
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

■ Receiving traffic information
automatically

Program Service Program service name

RECEIVER

SOURCE

Program Type

Current program type
Information on the current program

V-AUX

Radio Text
Clock Time

Current time

DSP Program

Sound mode name

Audio Decoder

Decoder name

AUDIO

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN 2 3 4

When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit
automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,
follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.

When “TUNER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program”
(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.

ZONE
SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not
displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System
service.

VOLUME

The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.
Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

OPTION

• To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor
keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed.

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

• To cancel the search, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

BAND
MODE

TUNING

The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the
search finishes.

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Finished
STEREO TUNED

TrafficProgram
TP FM101.30MHz

VOLUME
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

Traffic information station (frequency)

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

• “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information
stations are found.

■ Browse screen

Operating the radio on the TV

RECEIVER

SOURCE

V-AUX

You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the
TV.

AUDIO

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN 2 3 4

TUNER

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

ZONE

SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

■ Playback screen

VOLUME

1
TOP MENU

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

TUNING

Submenu

Function

Memory

Registers the current station to the
preset number selected in the list.

Auto Preset

Automatically registers FM radio
stations with strong signals (up to 40
stations).

Clear Preset

Clear the preset station selected in the
list.

Clear All Preset

Clear all the preset stations.

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.

Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

MODE

MOVIE

Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a
preset station and press ENTER to tune into it.

2 Preset number

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

1 Preset station list

TV CH
CODE SET

1 Radio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected
band (FM/AM) and frequency.
(U.K. and Europe models only)
When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.83), the
Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,”
“Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed.

Utility

2 TUNED/STEREO indicators
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.

3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu

Function

Browse

Moves to the browse screen (preset station list).

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.

1 Page Up
1 Page Down

Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.

Now Playing

Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.

• (U.K. and Europe models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto
Preset”.

Playing back music via Bluetooth

RECEIVER

SOURCE

V-AUX

You can play back music files stored on a Bluetooth device (such
as smartphones) on the unit.

AUDIO

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN 2 3 4

BLUETOOTH

On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start
playback.
The playback screen (artist name, album name and song
title) is displayed on the TV.

ZONE

The unit

SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

Bluetooth device
(such as smartphones)

VOLUME

• To use the Bluetooth function, set “Bluetooth” (p.147) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
TOP MENU

• “Not found” appears when no Bluetooth devices are detected.

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

• For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file
formats” (p.179).

ENTER

• If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit
automatically connects to the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish
another Bluetooth connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth
connection.
• To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following
operations.
– Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device.

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

External device
operation keys

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Playing back Bluetooth device music on the
unit
Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection
between a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit,
and play back music stored the Bluetooth device on the unit.

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

• The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth.

Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the
input source.

On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network
name of the unit) from the available device list.
A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will
be made.
If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”.

– Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit.
– Select “Disconnect” in “Audio Receive” (p.131) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.

Playing back iPod music
Connecting an iPod

You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable supplied with the iPod.

Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the iPod.
• For details on playable iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.179).

1
2

• The unit does not support a USB connection for iPad. To play back iPad music on the unit, use AirPlay
(p.101).

Connect the USB cable to the iPod.
Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.
The unit (front)
PHONES

USB
Connected

YPAO MIC

SILENT CINEMA

VOLUME
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby mode while the iPod is
charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If “Network Standby” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu is
set to “On”, it continues to charge without limit.

• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.

■ Browse screen

Playback of iPod content

RECEIVER

SOURCE

V-AUX

AUDIO

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN 2 3 4

1
2
3

Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start
playback.
You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
USB

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

ZONE

SCENE

1 Status indicators
MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

VOLUME

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.89) and playback status
(such as play/pause).

2 List name

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

3 Contents list
ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

4 Item number/total

MODE

TUNING

• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.

5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu

Function

1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH

10 Pages Up

CODE SET

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the
simple play mode (p.89).

Return

Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing

Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.

■ Playback screen

RECEIVER

SOURCE

V-AUX

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

AUDIO

MAIN 2 3 4

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod.

1
2

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

ZONE

• During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or
press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

SCENE

1 Status indicators
MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

VOLUME

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.89) and playback status
(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

OPTION
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

MEMORY
10

ENT

External device
operation keys
MODE

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu

Function

Browse

Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

Item

Shuffle
(Shuffle)

Setting

Function

Off (Off)

Turns off the shuffle function.

Songs (Songs)

Plays back songs in random order.
“x” appears in the TV screen.

Albums
(Albums)

Plays back albums in random order.
“x” appears in the TV screen.

Off (Off)

Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears in the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs repeatedly.
“v” appears in the TV screen.

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

• You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control
playback.

■ Operating the iPod itself (simple play)

Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.
The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are
enabled.
To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.

Operate your iPod itself to start playback.

Repeat
(Repeat)

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
Connecting a USB storage device

You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit.
The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or FAT32 format).

• The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired
network connection.

Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
The unit (front)
(CONNECT)

PROGRAM
ENTER

RETURN

• For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.179).

DISPLAY

PHONES

YPAO MIC

SILENT CINEMA

USB storage device

USB
Connected

VOLUME
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In this case, “Loading...”
appears in the front display.

• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.
• Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use extension cables.

Playback of USB storage device contents

RECEIVER

SOURCE

V-AUX

Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device
contents and start playback.

AUDIO

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN 2 3 4

USB

You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed
on the TV screen.

ZONE

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

BAND
MODE

TUNING

PRESET

• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
displayed.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.

CODE SET

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly
by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.110).

■ Browse screen

RECEIVER

SOURCE

1
2
3

V-AUX

AUDIO

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN 2 3 4

1 Status indicators
MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

SCENE

1
2
5

ZONE

■ Playback screen

VOLUME

2 List name

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.93) and playback status
(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

3 Contents list
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER

Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys
(q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

TUNING

External device
operation keys

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

BAND
MODE

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.93) and playback status
(such as play/pause).

Function

Browse

Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.

Function

1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return

Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing

Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.

• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the
remote control to control playback.

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

RECEIVER

SOURCE

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB
storage device contents.

V-AUX

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

AUDIO

MAIN 2 3 4

ZONE

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

VOLUME

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

Item

Shuffle
(Shuffle)

Setting

Function

Off (Off)

Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.

Off (Off)

Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Repeat
(Repeat)

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
❑ For Windows Media Player 11

You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.47). You can check
whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network”
(p.155) in the “Information” menu.
• The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired
network connection.

• For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.179).

1
2
3

Start Windows Media Player 11 on your PC.

Click “OK” to exit.

Select “Library”, then “Media Sharing”.
Check the “Share my media to” box, select the unit’s icon, and click
“Allow”.

Media sharing setup
• For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help.

To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to
configure the media sharing setting on each music server.

■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software
installed

■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed

Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media
sharing settings.

❑ For Windows Media Player 12

1
2
3
4

Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC.

Click “OK” to exit.

Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”.
Click “Turn on media streaming”.
Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model
name.

Playback of PC music contents

RECEIVER

SOURCE

Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and
start playback.

V-AUX

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

AUDIO

MAIN 2 3 4

NET

You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV
screen.

ZONE
SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.

Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.

BAND
MODE

TUNING

• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly
by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.110).

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the
playback screen is displayed.

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

MEMORY
10

ENT

Use the cursor keys to select a music server and
press ENTER.

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.

TV CH
CODE SET

■ Browse screen

RECEIVER

SOURCE

V-AUX

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN 2 3 4

SCENE

1 Status indicators

1 Status indicators
MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

ZONE

1
2

1
2
3

AUDIO

■ Playback screen

VOLUME

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.97) and playback status
(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

2 List name

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

OPTION

3 Contents list
ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER

Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

TUNING

External device
operation keys

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu

3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

BAND
MODE

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.97) and playback status
(such as play/pause).

Function

1 Page Up

Function

Browse

Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

• You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control
playback (some functions may not work depending on the PC/NAS).

Return

Returns to the higher-level list.

• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.122).

Now Playing

Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.

10 Pages Down

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

RECEIVER

SOURCE

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC
music content.

V-AUX

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

AUDIO

MAIN 2 3 4

ZONE

When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

VOLUME

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

Item

Shuffle
(Shuffle)

Setting

Function

Off (Off)

Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.

Off (Off)

Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Repeat
(Repeat)

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Listening to Internet radio

RECEIVER

SOURCE

V-AUX

You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.

Playback of Internet radio

AUDIO

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN 2 3 4

NET

ZONE

• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.47). You can
check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly
assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.155) in the “Information” menu.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.
SCENE

Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the
input source.

• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.

• This service may be discontinued without notice.
MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

BAND
MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and
the playback screen is displayed.

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.110).

■ Browse screen

RECEIVER

SOURCE

V-AUX

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN 2 3 4

SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

ZONE

1
2

1
2
3

AUDIO

■ Playback screen

1 Playback indicator

2 List name

2 Playback information

VOLUME

ON
SCREEN

Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to
select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER

BAND
MODE

TUNING

External device
operation keys

PRESET

Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Contents list

POP-UP/MENU

3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Function

Bookmark On

Adds the current station to the “Bookmarks” folder
(p.100).

Browse

Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

MEMORY
10

ENT

Function

Bookmark On
(Bookmark Off)

Adds/removes the station selected in the list to/from
the “Bookmarks” folder (p.100).

1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

• You can use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to stop
playback.

Return

Returns to the higher-level list.

• Some information may not be available depending on the station.

Now Playing

Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.

10 Pages Down

Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks)

RECEIVER

SOURCE

V-AUX

By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Bookmarks”,
you can quickly access to them from the “Bookmarks” folder in the
browse screen.

AUDIO

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN 2 3 4

■ Registering the station on the
browse/playback screen

ZONE

Access the vTuner website
(http://yradio.vtuner.com/) with the web browser on
your PC and enter the vTuner ID.
You can switch the language.

SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

Select the desired Internet radio station in the
browse screen or start playback of it to display the
playback screen.

Press the cursor key (r) to select “Bookmark On”
and press ENTER.

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

The selected station is added to the “Bookmarks” folder.

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

Enter the vTuner ID in this area.

DISPLAY
BAND

• To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” folder, select the station in the
“Bookmarks” folder and then “Bookmark Off”.

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

• To use this feature, you need to create your personal account. Create your
account using your e-mail address.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

■ Registering the station on the vTuner
website

TV CH

Select any of Internet radio stations on the unit.
This operation is necessary to register the radio station for
the first time.

CODE SET

Check the vTuner ID of the unit.
You can find the vTuner ID in “Network” (p.155) in the
“Information” menu.

100

• To remove the station from the “Bookmarks” folder, select “Bookmarks” in
the Home screen, and then click the “Remove” icon (❤–) next to the station
name.

Playing back music with AirPlay
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents

The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network.
iTunes

Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit.

(wired or wireless)

Router
The unit

Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback
screen on the iPod.
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon (
iTunes (example)

(wired or wireless)

iPod iOS7/iOS8 (example)

) appears.

iPod iOS6 (example)

iPhone/iPad/
iPod touch
• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check
whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network”
(p.155) in the “Information” menu.
• When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to
connect. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.

On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit
(network name of the unit) as the audio output device.
iTunes (example)

iPod (example)

• For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.179).
• You can restrict access to the unit using the AirPlay password (p.113).

Network name of the unit

Select a song and start playback.

The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

101

RECEIVER

SOURCE

• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by
setting “Network Standby” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.

V-AUX

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on
iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.146) in the “Setup” menu.

AUDIO

MAIN 2 3 4

• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the
remote control to control playback.

• If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the
iTunes/iPod stops automatically.
• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable
volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.122) in the “Input”
menu to “Off”.

ZONE

• To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to
configure the iTunes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers
in advance.

iTunes (example of English version)

SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

Caution
• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be
unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the
volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod
immediately.

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER

■ Playback screen
1
2

BAND
MODE

TUNING

External device
operation keys

PRESET

Check this box

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

MEMORY
10

ENT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

1 Playback indicator
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
Menu

Function

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.

102

Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room
where the unit is installed (main zone) and in other rooms (Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4).

Multi-zone configuration examples

For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person
can listen to PC music in the study room (Zone2), and another can listen to radio in the
guest room (Zone3) and play DVD in the kitchen (Zone4).

■ Enjoying music in other rooms
You can enjoy music using speakers placed in other rooms.

• Video/audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how you connect the device in
each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.181).
• Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that
you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the multi-zone
connections that best meet your requirements.

Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)

Study room
(Zone2 and/or Zone3)

Living room (main zone)
Connections
Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.36
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.105

103

■ Enjoying videos/music in other rooms

Preparing the multi zone system

You can enjoy videos/music using TVs placed in other rooms.

Connect the device that will be used in other rooms to the unit.

❑ Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers

Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external
amplifier.

Video (ZONE OUT or HDMI)

• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the
unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,
“Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.

Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)

■ Connecting speakers to play back audio
Connect speakers to play back audio in Zone2 or Zone3. The connection method
varies depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier).

Guest room
(Zone2 or Zone3)

❑ Using the unit’s internal amplifier
Living room (main zone)

Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit with speaker cables. For
details, see “Connecting Zone2/3 speakers” (p.36).

Connections
TV (for analog video playback): p.105
TV (for digital video playback): p.106
Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.36
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.105

❑ Enjoying videos/music using only a TV

Video/audio (HDMI)

Kitchen
(Zone2 or Zone4)

Living room (main zone)
Connection
TV: p.106

104

❑ Using an external amplifier

■ Connecting a video monitor to play back analog videos

Connect the external amplifier placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit with a stereo pin
cable and connect speakers to the external amplifier.

Connect a video monitor to watch analog videos at Zone2 or Zone3. Depending on the
video input jacks available on your video monitor, choose one of the video connection
methods.

The unit (rear)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

AV 3

AV 4

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

ZONE OUT
(ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks

• The video conversion between the analog video jacks does not work for multi-zone video output. To watch
videos played back on a video device on the zone video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to
the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD
player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks with a component video cable.

The unit (rear)

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3
A

AV 1

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F. PRESENCE R. PRESENCE

SURROUND

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

FRONT

SURROUND

PR Y
(SINGLE)

SUR. BACK

SUB

SURROUND

ZONE 2 /
F.PRESENSE

ZONE 3 /
R.PRESENSE

(4 RADIO)

HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT

ANTENNA
75Ω

(HDCP2.2)

ZONE OUT)

External amplifier
Audio input
(analog stereo)

AV 2

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

AV 3

AV 4

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 1

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

FRONT

SURROUND

AV 3

(FRONT)

SUR. BACK

SUBWOOFER

PR
2

SURROUND

Video input
(component video or
composite video)

PR Y
(SINGLE)

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F. PRESENCE R. PRESENCE

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

(REAR)

SURROUND BACK

PR
CENTER

ZONE 2/

COMPONENT VIDEO

AUDIO

Y
SINGLE

ZONE OUT jacks
(COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO)

VIDEO
V

Zone2 or Zone3

Main zone

• (RX-A3050 only)
You cannot use an external amplifier for Zone2 when the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks are set to output front
presence channel audio in “Power Amp Assign” (p.133) in the “Setup” menu. Also, you cannot use an
external amplifier for Zone3 when the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks are configured to output rear presence
channel audio.

Zone2 or Zone3
Main zone

To assign the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks to the video monitor for Zone2 or
Zone3, set “Monitor Out Assign” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone3”.

105

■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio

• When the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, you can enable/disable the audio output
from the HDMI OUT 2 jack by setting “Audio Output” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Off” (default).

Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back videos/audio at
Zone2 or Zone4. If you connect an AV amplifier, you can enjoy multichannel playback in
another room (Zone4).

• You can also use speakers placed in Zone2 to output audio (p.36).
• Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the following operations is
performed.
– Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input

• To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2 or Zone4, you need to connect the video device to
the unit with an HDMI cable (p.42).

– Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source
– Changing the sound mode or audio settings

• We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected to the unit.
• On-screen operations are not available for Zone2 and Zone4.

HDMI OUT 2
(ZONE OUT) jack

The unit (rear)

(Example: using a TV)
HDMI input

HDMI OUT
2

HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

AUDIO 2

(HDCP2.2)

AV 3

AV 1

AV 4

HDMI

HDMI (HDCP

AV 3
(ZONE
OUT)

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

HDMI
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

HDMI

AUDIO 3
A

AV 1

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F. PRESENCE R. PRESENCE

SURROUND

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

FRONT

SURROUND

PR
(SINGLE)

SUR. BACK

SURRO

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

75Ω

Zone2 or Zone4
(Example: using an AV amplifier)
HDMI input
HDMI
HDMI

Main zone

Zone4

To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2 or Zone4, set “HDMI OUT2 Assign”
(p.149) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”.

106

■ Operating the unit from another room
(remote connection)

Remote connections between Yamaha products
An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that
support remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals
by connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an
infrared signal receiver.

You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 using the
supplied remote control if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks.

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
REMOTE

• To operate external devices with the supplied remote control, you must register a remote control code for
each device before using (p.160).

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
REMOTE

OUT

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

The unit (rear)

Infrared signal
receiver
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
AV 2

AV 3

NETWO

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AV 7

Yamaha products
(up to six, including the unit)

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

TRIGGER
OUT

REMOTE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

OUT

2
A

AV 1

T/PRE OUT

PR Y

AV 3

PRE OUT

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

SUBWOOFER

REMOTE

OUT

Remote control

ZONE 3/
R. PRESENCE

FRONT

(REAR)

CENTER

SPEAKERS

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP2

CENTER

Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
SINGLE

Infrared signal
transmitter

Infrared
signal
receiver

External device
(such as a CD player)
Remote control

Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4

Main zone

107

RECEIVER

SOURCE

RECEIVER z

Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4

V-AUX

AUDIO

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN 2 3 4

Input selection keys

1
2

ZONE

ZONE
SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

VOLUME

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.

Press RECEIVER z.

For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.

Each time you press the key, the selected zone is enabled
or disabled.

• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.81)

When zone audio output is enabled, the corresponding
zone indicator lights up in the front display.

• Playing back iPod music (p.87)

Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.

OPTION

• Video/audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how
you connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details,
see “Multi-zone output” (p.181).

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

• You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each
zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is
selected for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches
to “SERVER”.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.

Use the ZONE switch to select a zone.

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.86)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.90)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.94)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.98)
• Playing back music with AirPlay (p.101)

• You can also use the web control (p.111) to control Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4.
• AirPlay is available in Zone2 and Zone3 only when AirPlay playback is
ongoing in the main zone.

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

• The Zone2/Zone3 input automatically switches in conjunction with the input
source selected in the main zone when “Main Zone Sync” is selected as the
Zone2/Zone3 input with the web control (p.111) or AV CONTROLLER
(p.11).

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH

• To play back DSD audio in Zone2/Zone3, select “Main Zone Sync” as the
Zone2/Zone3 input or use the party mode (p.109).

CODE SET

Caution
• To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2, Zone3 or
Zone4.

108

RECEIVER

SOURCE

V-AUX

AUDIO

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

■ Other operations for Zone2, Zone3 or
Zone4

■ Enjoying the same source in multiple
rooms (party mode)

The following functions are also available when the zone you want
to operate is enabled.

The party mode allows you to play back in all zones the same
music that is being played back in the main zone. During the party
mode, stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones.
Utilize this function when you want to use main zone music as
background music for a house party.

Adjusting the volume (for Zone2 and Zone3 only)
Press VOLUME or MUTE.

MAIN 2 3 4

ZONE

PARTY

Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE)

SCENE

Press SCENE.

SCENE

VOLUME

MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

VOLUME

DISPLAY

Adjusting the high-/low-frequency range of sounds
(for Zone2 and Zone3 only)

BAND

PRESET

a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the zone to be
operated.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

SLEEP
3

MEMORY
10

ENT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

• To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene,
hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front
display. (Only an input source can be registered for Zone4.)

Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30
min, off).

MODE

Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or
off.

b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.
c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

TV CH
CODE SET

When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the
front display.

Setting the sleep timer

ENTER

TUNING

Press PARTY.

MUTE

OPTION

RETURN

Default
0.0 dB

Adjusting the front speaker balance (for Zone2 and Zone3 only)
a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the zone to be
operated.
b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Balance”.
c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

109

• You can select the zones to be included in the party mode in “Party Mode
Set” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu.

• Zone4 output is available only when an HDMI input is selected in the main
zone.

Registering favorite items (shortcut)

RECEIVER

SOURCE

V-AUX

You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents as
shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut
numbers.

AUDIO

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN 2 3 4

BLUETOOTH
USB
NET

• You can also use the “Bookmarks” feature to register Internet radio stations
(p.100).

ZONE
SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

• Only the input source will be registered for Bluetooth and AirPlay. Individual
contents cannot be registered.

VOLUME

Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number.
OPTION

1
2

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

Play back a song or a radio station to be registered.
Press MEMORY.

Memory Preset
01:Empty

MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

VOLUME
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

Shortcut number (flashes)

Recall Preset
01:USB

VOLUME
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

• The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases.
– The USB storage device which contains the registered item is not
connected to the unit.

– The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of
service.

TV VOL

Use the numeric keys to enter a shortcut number
(01 to 40).

– The PC/NAS which contains the registered item is turned off or not
connected to the network

Numeric keys
MEMORY

• To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use
numeric keys to select the shortcut number after Step 2.

INPUT
MUTE

Press BLUETOOTH, USB or NET.

• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

1
2

• “No Presets” appears when no items are registered.

MODE

TUNING

Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number.

You can also use PRESET on the front panel to select a
shortcut.

Registering an item

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

Recalling a registered item

TV CH
CODE SET

Memory Preset
02:Empty

VOLUME
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

“Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered

To confirm the registration, press MEMORY.

110

– The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location.
– A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
• When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC/NAS,
the unit memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you
have added or deleted any music files to or from the folder, the unit may not
recall the music file correctly. In such cases, register the items again.

Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control)
You can control the unit with the web control screen displayed in a web browser.
Web browser

• You can check the IP address of the unit in “Network” (p.155) in the “Information” menu.
• You can bookmark the unit’s IP address in the browser or create a shortcut link (p.113) to access the
web control screen quickly in the future. However, if you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of
the unit may change each time the unit is turned on.

Web control

(wired or wireless)
PC

• If you have enabled the MAC address filter (p.146), you need to specify the MAC address of your PC
to allow the PC to access the unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC,
refer to its instruction manual.

Web control

• If you are using Windows 8, we recommend you start Internet Explorer in the following way.

(wired or wireless)
Router

The unit

– Select “Desktop” in the Start screen and click the Internet Explorer icon at the bottom left of the
screen.
• By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an
iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices (p.11).

• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router.
• Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of the unit to your PC. In these
cases, configure the security software appropriately.
• To display the web control screen or turn on the unit from the web control when the unit is in standby
mode, set “Network Standby” (p.113) to “On”.
• We recommend using one of the following web browsers.
– Internet Explorer 9.x, 10.x or 11.x
– Safari 7.x

1
2

Start the web browser.
Enter the IP address of the unit in the address bar of the web browser.
(Example)

111

■ Top menu screen

■ Control screen
3

6
2
3
4

1 PLAY INFO

1 CONTROL

Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone.

Moves to the control screen for the selected zone.

2 TOP MENU

2 STATUS

Moves to the top menu screen.

Turns on/off the power for each zone or displays the input source and volume set for each zone.

3 SCENE

3 SETTINGS

Selects a scene for the selected zone.

Moves to the settings screen.

4 POWER

4 PARTY MODE

Turns on/off the power for the selected zone.

Turns on/off the party mode (p.109).

5 VOLUME

5 SYSTEM POWER

Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You can also select the
increments used for volume adjustment.

Turns on/off the power for all zones.

6 MAIN VOLUME

6 RELOAD

Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can also select the
increments used for volume adjustment.

Reloads the current status of the unit.

7 RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.

• Multi-zone volume adjustment is not available when an external amplifier is used.
• Multi-zone volume adjustment on the web control may not work on the unit depending on the unit’s settings.

112

■ Settings screen

2 BACK
Moves to the top menu screen.

3 RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.

Note
• If the network settings are changed, you may need to restart the browser or regain access to the unit.
• When using the MAC address filter, make sure you specify the MAC addresses of your network
devices correctly. Otherwise, the unit will be inaccessible from your network devices such as PCs and
other external devices.

• Do not operate the unit during the recovery process, as this may result in the incorrect recovery of the
settings. When the recovery finishes, click “OK” to set the unit to standby mode.

• The backup does not contain user information (such as user account and password) or unit-specific
information (such as MAC address and IP address).

1 Rename

• Some characters entered with a PC may not appear correctly on the unit.

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.146) or the name of each zone
(p.147). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.

Network
Selects the network connection method (p.144) or configures the network parameters (such as
IP address) (p.145). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.

AirPlay Password
Sets the password to restrict access to the unit via AirPlay (p.101). Click “APPLY” to apply the
changes to the unit.

MAC Filter
Sets the MAC address filter (p.146) to limit access to the unit from the network devices. Click
“APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.

Auto Reload
Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On” (enabled), the web control
screen reloads the status of the unit every 5 seconds.

Network Standby
Enables/disables the network standby function (p.145).

Backup/Recovery
Creates a backup of the unit’s settings on the PC or restores the settings from the backup.

Firmware Update
Updates the firmware of the unit by using the firmware you have downloaded on the PC.
Follow the on-screen instructions to start the firmware update.

Create Link
Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen.

Tips
Displays tips for use of the web control.

Licenses
Displays the licenses of the software used in the unit.

113

Viewing the current status

RECEIVER

SOURCE

V-AUX

PHONO

Switching information on the front display

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN 2 3 4

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

ZONE
SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

Info
Audio Decoder

VOLUME

Input source group
Bluetooth
USB
SERVER
AirPlay

VOLUME
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

NET RADIO

Item
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*)
* During simple playback of iPod:
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)

Song (song title), Album (album name), Station
(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),
Audio Decoder (decoder name*)

Item name
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.

OPTION

Viewing the status information on the TV

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

AV1
†‡PLƒx MOVIE

DISPLAY

BAND
MODE

TUNING

PRESET

* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio
decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.

VOLUME
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

Information

MOVIE

Press DISPLAY.
The following information is displayed on the TV.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Compressed Music Enhancer/Hi-Res mode status

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed
item can also be applied separately to each input source group.

Input source group

Item

AV 1–7
V-AUX
AUDIO 1–3
PHONO

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)

Input source/
Party mode
status

Volume/
YPAO
Volume
status

Audio format/
Decoder

Sound
mode

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)
TUNER

* (U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is
tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.83).

CINEMA DSP status

114

To close the information display, press DISPLAY.

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
Option menu items

You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This
menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily
configure settings during playback.

Press OPTION.

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

Option
{}Tone Control

• Default settings are underlined.
VOLUME
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

Front display

Item

Function

Tone Control
(Tone Control)

Adjusts the high-frequency range and
low-frequency range of sounds.

116

YPAO Volume
(YPAO Vol.)

Enables/disables YPAO Volume.

116

Adaptive DRC
(A.DRC)

Sets whether the dynamic range (from
maximum to minimum) is automatically
adjusted when the volume is adjusted.

116

Dialogue Level
(Dialog Lvl)

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds.

117

Dialogue Lift
(Dialog Lift)

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue
sounds.

117

Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.

117

Enables/disables Extra Bass.

117

Enhancer
(Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music
Enhancer.

118

Hi-Res Mode
(HiRes Mode)

Enables/disables the high-resolution mode (for
enhancing the quality of uncompressed digital
audio).

118

Enables/disables the video signal processing
settings configured in the “Setup” menu.

118

Selects a video adjustment setting from
presets.

118

Input Trim
(In.Trim)

Corrects volume differences between input
sources.

119

Audio Select
(A.Sel)

Selects the audio input jack to use when more
than one audio connection is made for one
input source.

119

Video Out
(V.Out)

Selects a video to be output with the audio
input source.

119

YPAO Volume
(YPAO Volume)

Dialogue
(Dialog)

Subwoofer Trim
(SW.Trim)
Subwoofer/Bass
(Subwoofer/Bass) Extra Bass
(Extra Bass)

TV screen

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

Enhancer
(Enhancer)

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

3
4

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
Video Mode
Video Processing (V.M)
(Video Process.)
Video Adjustment
(Video Adjust)

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Input Settings
(Input Settings)

115

Page

Item

Function

FM Mode
(FM Mode)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM
radio reception.

119

Traffic Program
(TrafficProgram)

(U.K. and Europe models only)
Automatically searches for a traffic information
station.

Shuffle
(Shuffle)

Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod
(p.89), USB storage device (p.93), or media
server (p.97).

—

Repeat
(Repeat)

Configures the repeat setting for the iPod
(p.89), USB storage device (p.93), or media
server (p.97).

—

■ YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume)

Page

Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC.

YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and
low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that
you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume.
Settings
Off (Off)

Disables YPAO Volume.

On (On)

Enables YPAO Volume.

■ Tone Control (Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.

• YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have been already
saved (p.51).

Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)

• We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower
volumes or at night.

Setting range
-6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments

Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically
adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for
listening to playback at a low volume at night.

• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.

Settings
• You can also adjust the “Tone Control” setting with the front panel controls by pressing TONE/BALANCE
repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”, and PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

Off (Off)

The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.

On (On)

Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is
enabled.

If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide
at a high volume.

On
Off
Input level

116

Volume: high
Output level

Output level

Volume: low

On
Off
Input level

■ Dialogue (Dialog)

■ Subwoofer/Bass (Subwoofer/Bass)

Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.

Adjust the subwoofer volume or bass sound.

Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)

Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard
clearly, you can turn up its volume by increasing this setting.

Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Setting range
0 to 3

Extra Bass (Extra Bass)

Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)

Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy
enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the
presence or absence of the subwoofer.

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is
coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing
this setting.

Settings

• This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.
– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo) is selected when front
presence speakers are used.
– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.76) is working.
(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)

Setting range
0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)

Ideal position

117

Off (Off)

Disables Extra Bass.

On (On)

Enables Extra Bass.

■ Enhancer (Enhancer)

■ Video Processing (Video Process.)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer and the high-resolution mode.

Configures the video signal processing settings.

Enhancer (Enhancer)

Video Mode (V.M)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.80).

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video
adjustments) settings configured in “Processing” (p.141) in the “Setup” menu.
Settings

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
• Compressed Music Enhancer works on the main zone, Zone2 and Zone3.

Direct (Direct)

Disables the video signal processing.

• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer
(p.80).

Processing
(Processing)

Enables the video signal processing.

Settings
Off (Off)

Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

On (On)

Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.

Video Adjustment (Video Adjust)
Selects a video adjustment setting from presets you have configured in
“Adjustment” (p.142) in the “Setup” menu.

Default
TUNER, Bluetooth, USB, (network sources): On (On)
Others: Off (Off)

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Settings
1 to 6

• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz.

Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode)
Enables/disables the high-resolution mode when “Enhancer” is set to “On”. If this
function is set to “On”, you can enhance the quality of uncompressed digital audio
(such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) using Compressed Music Enhancer.
Settings

On (On)

Enables the high-resolution mode.
(The high-resolution mode may not work depending on the audio
signal processing condition.)

Off (Off)

Disables the high-resolution mode.

118

■ Input Settings (Input Settings)

■ FM Mode (FM Mode)

Configures the input settings.

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.
Settings

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Input Trim (In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume
differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Audio Select (A.Sel)
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made
for one input source.
Settings

Auto (Auto)

Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order.
1. HDMI input
2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)
3. Analog input (AUDIO)

HDMI (HDMI)

Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals
are input through the HDMI jack.

Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are
Coax/Opt (Coax/Opt) produced when no signals are input through the COAXIAL or OPTICAL
jack.
Analog (Analog)

Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when
no signals are input through the AUDIO jacks.

Video Out (V.Out)
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
Settings
Off (Off)

Does not output video.

AV 1–7 (AV1–7),
V-AUX (V-AUX)

Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.

119

Stereo (Stereo)

Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.

Mono (Mono)

Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.

CONFIGURATIONS
4

Configuring input sources (Input menu)

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.

1
2

Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

5
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured
and press the cursor key (q).

The input source of the unit also changes.

• You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

120

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Input menu items

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Default settings are underlined.

Item

Function

Page

Rename/Icon Select

Changes the input source name and icon.

121

Decoder Mode

Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS.

122

Volume Interlock

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via
AirPlay.

122

DMC Control

Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media
Controller (DMC) to control playback.

122

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

■ Rename/Icon Select
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.

Input sources
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, USB

■ Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w).

• You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected.

2
3

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

121

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Decoder Mode

■ DMC Control

Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”.

Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback.

For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder
Mode” to “DTS”.

Input source
SERVER

Input sources
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–3 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned)

Settings

Settings
Auto

Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.

DTS

Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)

■ Volume Interlock

Disable

Does not allow DMCs to control playback.

Enable

Allows DMCs to control playback.

• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.
When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media
Player 12) on the same network.

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.
Input sources
AirPlay
Settings
Off

Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.

Limited

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range
(-80 dB to -20 dB and mute).

Full

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to
+16.5 dB and mute).

122

5
6

Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.73) using the TV screen.

1
2

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Scene menu items

Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
Item

Function

Save

Registers the current settings in the selected scene.

Page
123

Load

Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can
also configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items
to be included as the scene assignments, or view the settings
currently assigned to the selected scene.

124

Rename/Icon Select

Changes the scene name and icon.

125

Reset

Restores the default settings for the selected scene.

125

■ Save

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and
press the cursor key (q).

Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the
selected scene.

• If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device
assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.74).

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

123

■ Load

Detail

Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.

Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the
settings currently assigned to the selected scene.

Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene
assignments.

To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item
and press ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude).

Device Control

For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio
with low volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 (TV)
and include “Volume” in the assignments for SCENE4 (RADIO).

Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected
to the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback)
Settings
Off

Disables the SCENE link playback function.

HDMI Control

Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this if
an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is
connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports
HDMI Control.

Check or uncheck

Default
SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control
SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO), SCENE5–12: Off

Choices

• To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set
“HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.182).

Input

Input (p.72), Audio Select (p.119)

HDMI Output

HDMI Output (p.72)

Mode

DSP Program (p.75), Pure Direct Mode (p.139), Enhancer (p.80),
Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.118)

Sound

Tone Control (p.116), YPAO Volume (p.116), Adaptive DRC (p.116),
Extra Bass (p.117)

Surround

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.140), Dialogue Lift (p.117), Dialogue Level
(p.117), Subwoofer Trim (p.117)

Video

Video Mode (p.141), Video Adjustment (p.118)

Volume

Master Volume (p.72)

Lipsync

Lipsync (p.138), Delay (p.139)

Speaker Setup

Setting Pattern (p.133), PEQ Select (p.137)

Default
Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected
Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected

124

■ Rename/Icon Select

■ Reset

Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.

Restores the default settings (p.73) for the selected scene.

■ Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).

2
3

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

125

Configuring sound programs/surround
decoders (DSP Program menu)

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the
TV screen.

1
2

Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

5
6
3

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be
configured and press the cursor key (q).

• You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

126

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

DSP Program menu items

Item

Function

Settings

Reverb Time

Adjust the decay time of the rear
reverberant sound.

1.0 s to 5.0 s
Higher to enrich the reverberant
sound and lower to have clear
sound.

Reverb Delay

Adjusts the delay between the
direct sound and reverberant
sound generation.

0 ms to 250 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.

Reverb Level

Adjusts the volume of the
reverberant sound.

0% to 100%
Higher to strengthen the
reverberant sound, and lower to
weaken it.

• Available items and the default settings vary depending on the selected sound program or surround
decoder.
• Default settings are underlined.

■ Settings for sound programs
Item

Function

Settings

Decode Type

Selects a surround decoder to be
used in combination with the
selected sound program.

bSurround*,
bPLIIx Movie (bPLII Movie),
bPLIIx Music* (bPLII Music*),
bPLIIx Game* (bPLII Game*),
Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music*
(* Available only when
“SURROUND DECODER” is
selected)

DSP Level

-6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB
Adjusts the sound field effect level. Higher to enhance the sound field
effect, and lower to reduce it.

Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the
direct sound and presence sound
field generation.

Surround Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the
direct sound and surround sound
field generation.

Surround Back Initial
Delay

Adjusts the delay between the
direct sound and surround back
sound field generation.

Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of
the presence sound field.

Surround Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of
the surround sound field.

Surround Back Room
Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of
the surround back sound field.

Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the presence
sound field.

Surround Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround
sound field.

Surround Back
Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround
back sound field.

1 ms to 99 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.

1 ms to 49 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.

0.1 to 2.0
Higher to enhance the broadening
effect, and lower to reduce it.

0 to 10
Higher to enhance the reflectivity,
and lower to reduce it.

127

■ Settings for decoders

The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “9ch Stereo”.
Sound program

2ch Stereo

Item

Function

Settings

Direct

Selects whether to
automatically bypass the
DSP circuit when an
analog audio source is
played back.

Auto, Off

Level

Front / Rear Balance

Left / Right Balance

The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND
DECODER” to “bSurround”, “bPLIIx Music” (bPLII Music) or “Neo:6 Music”.
Decode Type

bSurround

Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to 0 to +5
Adjusts the front and rear
volume balance.

Monaural Mix

Adjusts the left and right
volume balance.

-5 to 0 to +5
Higher to enhance the right
side, and lower to enhance
the left side.

Adjust the height volume
balance using the
presence speakers.

0 to 5 to 10
Higher to enhance the
upside, and lower to
enhance the downside. (The
presence speakers do not
produce sounds when
“Height Balance” is set to
“0”.)

Enables/disables
monaural sound output.

Function

Settings

Center Spread

Selects whether to
spread the center
channel signals to left
and right when
2-channel source is
played.

Off, On
Select “On” to spread center
channel signals to left and right if
you feel the center sound is too
strong when 2-channel source is
played.

Panorama

Adjusts the broadening
effect of the front sound
field.

Off, On
Select “On” to wrap front left/right
channel sounds around the field
and generate a spacious sound
field in combination with the
surround sound field.

Center Width

Adjusts the broadening
effect of the center
sound field.

0 to 3 to 7
Higher to enhance the broadening
effect, and lower to reduce it
(closer to center).

Dimension

Adjusts the difference in
level between the front
and surround sound
fields.

-3 to 0 to +3
Higher to strengthen the front
sound field and lower to strengthen
the surround sound field.

Center Image

Adjusts the center
orientation level
(broadening effect) of
the front sound field.

0.0 to 0.3 to 1.0
Higher to strengthen the center
orientation level (less broadening
effect) and lower to weaken (more
broadening effect).

-5 to 0 to +5
Higher to enhance the front
side, and lower to enhance
the rear side.

9ch Stereo

Height Balance

Item

bPLIIx Music
(bPLII Music)

Off, On
Neo:6 Music

• Available items in “9ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.

128

Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

1
2

Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

5
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.

129

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Setup menu items
Menu

Item

Function
Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO).

Setting Pattern

Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.

133

Setting Data Copy

Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.

133

Power Amp Assign

Selects a speaker system.

133

Front

Selects the size of the front speakers.

134

Center

Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.

134

Auto Setup

Speaker

Page

Configuration
Manual Setup

Surround

Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size.

134

Surround Back

Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size.

135

Front Presence

Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size.

135

Rear Presence

Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected and their size.

135

Subwoofer 1
Subwoofer 2

Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack and its phase.

135

Layout

Selects the layouts of the surround speakers, front/rear presence speakers and subwoofers.

136

Distance

Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position.

137

Level

Adjusts the volume of each speaker.

137

Parametric EQ

Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.

137

Test Tone

Enables/disables the test tone output.

138

130

Item

Lipsync

Sound

Function

Page

Delay Enable

Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.

138

Auto/Manual Select

Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.

138

Adjustment

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually.

139

Dynamic Range

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback.

139

Max Volume

Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.

139

Initial Volume

Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on.

139

Pure Direct Mode

Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode.

139

Adaptive DSP Level

Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.

139

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode

Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D.

140

Virtual Presence Speaker
(RX-A3050 only)

Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers.

140

Virtual Surround Back Speaker

Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers.

140

Object Decode Mode

Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos contents.

140

Video

Video Mode

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments).

141

HDMI Control

Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input).

143

HDMI

Audio Output

Selects a device to output audio.

143

Standby Through

Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode.

144

Network Connection

Selects the network connection method.

144

IP Address

Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).

145

Network Standby

Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices.

145

MAC Address Filter

Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.

146

Network Name

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices.

146

Enables/disables the Bluetooth functions.

147

Terminates the Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit.

Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby).

147

Network

Bluetooth
Bluetooth

Audio Receive

Disconnect

Bluetooth Standby

131

Item
Main Zone Set

Zone2 Set
Zone3 Set
Multi Zone

Function

Page

Zone Rename

Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

147

Volume

Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

148

Max Volume

Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone.

148

Initial Volume

Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.

148

Audio Delay

Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone2 or Zone3.

148

Mono

Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

148

Zone Rename

Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

148

Zone Rename

Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

149

Monitor Out Assign

Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks are used.

149

HDMI OUT2 Assign

Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.

149

Party Mode Set

Enables/disables switching to the party mode for each zone.

149

Input Assignment

Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source.

150

Zone4 Set

Display Set

Dimmer (Front Display)

Adjusts the brightness of the front display.

150

Short Message

Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated.

150

Wallpaper

Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.

151

Trigger Output1 Trigger Mode
Trigger Output2 Target Zone

Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.

151

Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.

151

Memory Guard

Prevents accidental changes to the settings.

152

Auto Power Standby

Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function.

152

ECO Mode

Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode).

153

Select an on-screen menu language.

153

Function

ECO
Language

132

■ Setting Data Copy

Speaker (Manual Setup)

Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.

Configures the speaker settings manually.

Choices
Pattern1 > 2

Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”.

Pattern2 > 1

Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”.

• Default settings are underlined.

■ Power Amp Assign
Selects a speaker system.
The unit has 9 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 11 speakers and up to
2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.
You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power
amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system.
Settings

■ Setting Pattern

Basic

Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to
9-channel plus rear presence speakers) (p.20).

7ch +1ZONE

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers in the main zone and
Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers (p.34).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks (default:
Zone2).

9ch +1ZONE

Select this when you use 9-channel speakers in the main zone and
Zone3 (or Zone2) speakers (p.34).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default:
Zone3).

7ch +2ZONE

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers in the main zone, plus
Zone2 and Zone3 speakers (p.35).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks (default:
Zone2) and EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone3).

9ch +RP

(RX-A3050 only)
Select this when you use 9-channel speakers plus rear presence
channel expansion using an external amplifier (p.31).

9ch +FRONT

(RX-A3050 only)
Select this when you use 9-channel speakers plus front channel
expansion using an external amplifier (p.32).

7ch +FP+RP

(RX-A3050 only)
Select this when you use 7-channel speakers, plus front presence and
rear presence channel expansion using an external amplifier (p.32).

Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.
When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in
the selected pattern.
• Measurement results (Auto Setup)
• Power Amp Assign
• Configuration
• Distance
• Level
• Parametric EQ
Settings
Pattern1, Pattern2

• The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Manual Setup” screen.
• This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your
listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed,
you can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them.

133

Center

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers plus front channel
expansion using an external amplifier in the main zone and Zone3 (or
7ch +FRONT+1ZONE Zone2) speakers (p.33).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default:
Zone3).

Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Settings

Select this when you use 5-channel speakers plus front channel
expansion using an external amplifier in the main zone, plus Zone2
5ch +FRONT+2ZONE and Zone3 speakers (p.33).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks (default:
Zone2) and EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone3).
7ch BI-AMP

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers (including bi-amp front
speakers) (p.30).

7ch BI-AMP +1ZONE

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers (including bi-amp front
speakers) in the main zone and Zone3 (or Zone2) speakers (p.30).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default:
Zone3).

Large

Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency
components.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).

None

Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.

Surround

(RX-A3050 only)
Select this when you use 7-channel speakers (including bi-amp front
7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP
speakers), plus front presence and rear presence channel expansion
using an external amplifier (p.31).

Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings

■ Configuration

Large

Select this option for large speakers.
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel
frequency components.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).

None

Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual
CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.

Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.

• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm
(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).

Front
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Settings

Large

Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency
components.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components
lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).

• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.

134

Surround Back

Rear Presence

Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.

Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected and their size.

Settings

Settings
Select this option when one large speaker is connected.
The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

Large x1

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

Select this option when two large speakers are connected.
The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.

None

Select this option when no rear presence speakers are connected.

Large x2

• This setting is not available when “Surround” or “Front Presence” is set to “None”.

Small x1

Select this option when one small speaker is connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).

Small x2

Select this option when two small speakers are connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).

None

Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or
SUBWOOFER 2 jack and its phase.
Settings

Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.
The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.

Normal

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER
1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase not reversed). The subwoofer will
produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency
components from other channels.

Reverse

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER
1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase reversed). The subwoofer will
produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency
components from other channels.

Use
• This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”, or when “Layout (Surround)” is set to
“Front”.

Front Presence
Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size.

None

Settings
Large

Select this option for large speakers.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

None

Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected.

Select this option when no subwoofer is connected to the
SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack. The front speakers will
produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency
components from other channels when both “Subwoofer 1” and
“Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.

• When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.

135

Rear Presence

Layout

Selects a rear presence layout when rear presence speakers are used. This
setting facilitates the optimization of the sound field effect.

Selects the layouts of the surround speakers, front/rear presence speakers and
subwoofers.

Settings

Surround
Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used.

Rear Height

Select this option when rear presence speakers are installed on the
rear side wall.

Overhead

Select this option when rear presence speakers are installed to the
ceiling.

Dolby Enabled SP

Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the rear
presence speakers.

Settings
Rear

Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side
of the room.

Front

Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front side
of the room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.78) works in this case.

• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround/Front Presence/Rear Presence)” is set to
“None”.
• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround)” is set to “None”.

• To play Dolby Atmos contents using the presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout” (p.24).

Front Presence

Subwoofer

Selects a front presence layout when front presence speakers are used. This
setting facilitates the optimization of the sound field effect.

Selects a subwoofer layout when 2 subwoofers are used.
Settings

Settings
Front Height

Select this option when front presence speakers are installed on the
front side wall.

Left + Right

Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the left and right
sides of the room.

Overhead

Select this option when front presence speakers are installed to the
ceiling.

Front + Rear

Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the front and rear
sides of the room.

Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the front
presence speakers.

Monaural x2

Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed freely.

Dolby Enabled SP

• This setting is not available when “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” is set to “None”.
• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Front Presence)” is set to “None”.
• To play Dolby Atmos contents using the presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout” (p.24).

136

■ Distance

■ Parametric EQ

Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance
from “Meter” or “Feet”.

Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
Settings

Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1,
Subwoofer 2

Manual

Setting range
0.30 m to 3.00 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments

■ Level

Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.

YPAO:Flat

Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.

YPAO:Front

Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the
front speakers.

YPAO:Natural

Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.

Through

Does not use the equalizer.

Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1,
Subwoofer 2

• “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto
Setup” have already been saved (p.51). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.

■ Manual equalizer adjustment

Setting range
-10.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

1
2
3

Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.
Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.
Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.

• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.
• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.51) to the “Manual” fields for
fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands
(4 for subwoofer) and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

Setting range
Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB

137

Sound

To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER
repeatedly to select an item.

Configures the audio output settings.

Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected
band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and
the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
Center frequency: 31.3 Hz to 16.0 kHz (31.3 Hz to 250.0 Hz for subwoofer)
Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Test Tone

■ Lipsync

Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.

Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output.

Settings

Delay Enable

Off

Does not output test tones.

Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance
or equalizer.

Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.
Choices
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–3
Settings
Disable

Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

Enable

Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

Auto/Manual Select
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range

138

Auto

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when
a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in
“Adjustment”.

Manual

Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video
and audio output manually.
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.

■ Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.

• Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on
the TV connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.

Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB

Adjustment
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual
Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when
“Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”.

■ Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Settings
Off

Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered
standby mode.

Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB,
0.5 dB increments).
(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)

■ Pure Direct Mode
Setting range
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)

Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.80).
Settings

• When “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, “Offset” shows the difference between automatic
adjustment and fine adjustment.

■ Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and
DTS signals) playback.

Auto

Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from the
selected input source or an input source that can be operated with the
on-screen display is selected. When no video signals are input, the
wall paper is displayed.

Video Off

Does not output video signals including the wall paper.

■ Adaptive DSP Level

Settings

Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.

Maximum

Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.

Standard

Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.

Minimum/Auto

Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low
volumes.
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is
automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.

Settings

139

Off

Does not adjust the effect level automatically.

Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO
measurement results and the volume level.

■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode

■ Virtual Surround Back Speaker
Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround
speakers. When VSBS is enabled, the unit creates VSBS when no surround back
speakers are connected.

Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD (RX-A3050) or CINEMA DSP 3D (RX-A2050)
3

(p.76). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP HD /CINEMA DSP 3D functions with
the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo).

Settings

Settings
Off

Disables CINEMA DSP HD3/CINEMA DSP 3D.

Enables CINEMA DSP HD3/CINEMA DSP 3D.

■ Virtual Presence Speaker

Off

Disables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).

Enables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).

• VSBS is effective only when 6.1- or 7.1-channel content is played back.

(RX-A3050 only)
Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and
surround speakers. When VPS is enabled, the unit creates front VPS when no front
presence speakers are connected, and creates rear VPS when front presence
speakers are connected but no rear presence speakers (p.76).

■ Object Decode Mode
Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos
contents.
Settings

Settings
Off

Disables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).

Disable

Disables playback of object-based audio signals. Those signals will be
played in normal 5.1-/7.1-channel audio.

Enables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).

Enable

Enables playback of object-based audio signals.

• Depending on the installation height of the surround speakers, VPS may not be effective. In this case, set
“Virtual Presence Speaker” to “Off”.

• Regardless of this setting, object-based audio signals are played in normal 5.1-/7.1-channel audio if any of
CINEMA DSP programs is selected.

140

Video

Resolution

Configures the video output settings.

Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Settings

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video
adjustments).

Processing

Enables the video signal processing.
Configure the settings in “Resolution”, “Aspect” and “Adjustment”.

Auto

Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.

480p/576p, 720p,
1080i, 1080p, 4K

Output video signals with a selected resolution.
(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)

Aspect

Settings
Disables the video signal processing.

Does not convert the resolution.

• If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.158) in
the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be
displayed on your TV normally.)

■ Video Mode

Direct

Through

Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Settings
Through

Does not convert the aspect ratio.

16:9 Normal

Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side
of the screen.

• When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to
reduce video output delay.
• This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i,
1080p, or 2160p (4K) signals.

141

Saturation

Adjustment

Adjusts the video saturation.

Configures the video adjustments when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. You
can register the video adjustments as presets (up to 6).

Setting range
-100 to 0 to +100

■ Setup procedure

1
2

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number and press ENTER.

3
4

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Detail Enhancement
Adjusts the enhancement effect of video details.
Setting range
0 to 50

Edge Enhancement
Adjusts the enhancement effect of video edges.
Setting range
0 to 50

Brightness
Adjusts the video brightness.
Setting range
-100 to 0 to +100

Contrast
Adjusts the video contrast.
Setting range
-100 to 0 to +100

142

HDMI

ARC

Configures the HDMI settings.

Enables/disables ARC (p.183) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
Off

Disables ARC.

Enables ARC.

• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers
connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the
unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers.

Standby Sync

■ HDMI Control

Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the
unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.182).

Settings

Settings
Off

Disables HDMI Control.

Off

Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”.

Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

Auto

Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the
unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.

■ Audio Output

• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.182) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.

Selects a device to output audio.

TV Audio Input
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI
Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio
when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.

• The “Amp” and “HDMI OUT1” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
• The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.149) is set to “Main”.

Amp

Settings
AUDIO 1–3

Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones connected
to the unit.

Default
AUDIO 1

Settings
• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for
connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.

143

Off

Disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.

Enables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.

HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2

Network

Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or
HDMI OUT 2 jack.

Configures the network settings.

Settings
Off

Disables the audio output from the TV.

Enables the audio output from the TV.

• The HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on.

■ Standby Through

■ Network Connection

Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the
unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input
selection keys (AV 1–7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in
standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks).

Selects the network connection method.
Settings

Settings
Off

(This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.)
Does not output videos/audio to the TV.

Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

Auto

Outputs videos/audio to the TV. If no signals are detected, the unit is
set to the power saving mode.

144

Wired

Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with a
commercially-available network cable (p.47).

Wireless (Wi-Fi)

Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via
the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, see
“Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.64).

Wireless Direct

Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the unit
directly. For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device to the
unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.70).

■ IP Address

■ Network Standby

Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).

Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network
standby).

DHCP

Settings

Select whether to use a DHCP server.
Off

Disables the network standby function.

Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

Auto

Enables the network standby function.
(If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power
saving mode when the network cable is disconnected.)

Settings
Off

Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters
manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.

Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network
parameters (such as IP address).

■ Manual network settings

1
2

Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.

IP Address

Specifies an IP address.

Subnet Mask

Specifies a subnet mask.

Default Gateway

Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.

DNS Server (P)

Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.

DNS Server (S)

Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys
(q/w) to select a value.

4
5
6
7

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

145

■ MAC Address Filter

■ Network Name

Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network
devices.

Filter

■ Procedure

Enables/disables the MAC address filter.

1
2

Settings
Off

Disables the MAC address filter.

Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the
MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access to
the unit.

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.

• AirPlay (p.101) and DMC (p.122) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter.

MAC Address 1–10
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be
permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
■ Procedure

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address
6–10” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press
ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys
(q/w) to select a value.

4
5
6

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

146

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Bluetooth

Multi Zone

Configures the Bluetooth settings.

Configures the multi zone settings.

■ Bluetooth

■ Main Zone Set

Enables/disables the Bluetooth function (p.86).

Configures the main zone setting.

Settings

Zone Rename

Off

Disables the Bluetooth function.

Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

Enables the Bluetooth function.

■ Procedure

1
2

■ Bluetooth Standby
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth
devices (Bluetooth standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns
on when a connect operation is performed on the Bluetooth device.

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.

Settings
Off

Disables the Bluetooth standby function.

Enables the Bluetooth standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

• This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.145) is set to “Off”.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

147

Initial Volume

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

Settings

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Zone2 Set, Zone3 Set

Off

Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby
mode.

Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB
increments).
(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)

Configures the Zone2 or Zone3 settings.

Volume
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.

If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable
the volume adjustment for the corresponding zone.

Audio Delay
Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone2 or Zone3 so that the audio is
synchronized with the video.

Settings
Fixed

Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

Variable

Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

Setting range
0 ms to 100 ms (1 ms increments)

Mono
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

• This setting is not available depending on the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.133).

Settings

Max Volume
Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.

Off

Produces stereo sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.

Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB

Produces monaural sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.

• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.

Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV
screen.

Zone Rename

You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main
Zone Set” (p.147).

148

■ Zone4 Set

■ Party Mode Set

Configures the Zone4 settings.

Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.109) for each zone.
Choice
Target: Zone2, Target: Zone3, Target: Zone4

Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

Settings

You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main
Zone Set” (p.147).

■ Monitor Out Assign
Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO and
VIDEO) jacks are used.
Settings
Main, Zone2, Zone3

• To watch videos played back on a video device on the zone video monitor, you need to connect the video
monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from
the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
with a component video cable.

■ HDMI OUT2 Assign
Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.
Settings
Main, Zone2, Zone4

• For details on video/audio signals that can be output to each zone, see “Multi-zone output” (p.181).

Audio Output
Enables/disables the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack when “HDMI OUT2
Assign” is set to “Zone2”.
On

Enables the audio output.

Off

Disables the audio output (video output only).

149

Disable

Disables switching to the party mode.

Enable

Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party
mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control.

Function

Use the cursor keys to select “b” and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.

■ Input Assignment

• You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source.

Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input
source.

■ Display Set

■ Procedure

Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.

Example: assigning the OPTICAL (b) jack to the input source “AV 2”

Dimmer (Front Display)

Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”,
and press ENTER.

Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)

• The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.153) is set to “On”.

Short Message
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is
operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment).
Settings

150

Displays short messages on the TV screen.

Off

Does not display short messages on the TV screen.

Manual

Wallpaper

Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger
Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function
of the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.

Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
Settings

Choices

Piano

Displays the piano image on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.

Gray

Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.

Low

Stops the electronic signal transmission.

High

Transmits the electronic signal.

Target Zone

■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2

Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.

Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone
or input switching.

Settings

Main

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.

Zone2

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.

Zone3

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with power status of Zone3.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with input switching in Zone3.

Zone4

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with power status of Zone4.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with input switching in Zone4.

All

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of any zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in any zone.

Trigger Mode
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Settings
Power

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the
zone specified with “Target Zone”.

Source

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in
the zone specified with “Target Zone”.
An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in
“Source”.

Manual

Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal
transmission with “Manual”.

Source
Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input,
switching when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.
Choices
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB
Settings
Low

Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input
source specified in this option.

High

Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source
specified in this option.

151

■ Memory Guard

ECO

Prevents accidental changes to the settings.

Configures the power supply settings.

Settings
Off

Does not protect the settings.

Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.

• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.

Icon

■ Auto Power Standby
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if
no input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into
standby mode.
Settings
Off

Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.

20 Minutes

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and
no input signals are detected for 20 minutes.

2 Hours, 4 Hours,
8 Hours, 12 Hours

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for
the specified time. For example, when “2 Hours” is selected, the unit
will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.

Default
U.K. and Europe models: 20 Minutes
Other models: Off

• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the
front display.

152

■ ECO Mode

Language

Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.
When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.

Select an on-screen menu language.

Settings
Off

Disables the eco mode.

Enables the eco mode.

• The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted.
• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.
• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.

Settings
English

English

日本語

Japanese

Français

French

Deutsch

German

Español

Spanish
Russian

Italiano

Italian
Chinese

• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

153

Types of information

Viewing information about the unit
(Information menu)

■ Audio Signal

You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.

1
2

Displays information about the current audio signal.

Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.

Format

Audio format of the input signal

Channel

The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)
For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total
(3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE).

Sampling

The number of samples per second of the input digital signal

Bitrate

The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal

Dialogue

The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal

Input

Output

The speaker terminals from which signals are output

• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the
specifications and settings of the playback device.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.

■ Video Signal
Displays information about the current video signal.

HDMI Signal

Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output

HDMI Resolution

Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)

Analog Resolution

Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT
jacks (analog)

■ HDMI Monitor

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.

154

Interface

TV interface

Video Resolution

Resolutions supported by the TV

■ Network

■ System

Displays the network information on the unit.

Displays the system information on the unit.

(When using wired or wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)

Remote ID

The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.157)

IP Address

IP address

TV Format

The unit’s video signal type (p.158)

Subnet Mask

Subnet mask

Speaker Impedance

The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.157)

Default Gateway

The IP address of the default gateway

Tuner Freq. Step

(Asia and General models only)
The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.157)

DNS Server (P)

The IP address of the primary DNS server
System ID

System ID number

DNS Server (S)

The IP address of the secondary DNS server
Firmware Version

The version of firmware installed on the unit

MAC Address (Ethernet)
MAC address
MAC Address (Wi-Fi)
vTuner ID

vTuner ID

Network Name

Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.146)

Wired/Wireless

The status of the wired or wireless connection

SSID

(When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
The SSID of the wireless network

• If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of
the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You
can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating
the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.163).

■ Multi Zone
Displays information about Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4.

(When using Wireless Direct)
SSID

The SSID of the wireless network

Security

Security method

Security Key

Security key

IP Address

IP address

Subnet Mask

Subnet mask

MAC Address (Wi-Fi)

MAC address

Network Connection

“Wireless Direct” indication

155

Input

The input source selected for Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4

Volume

The volume for Zone2 or Zone3

ADVANCED SETUP menu items

Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)

• Default settings are underlined.

Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.

1
2

Set the unit to standby mode.
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
MAIN ZONE z

Function

SPEAKER IMP.

Changes the speaker impedance setting.

157

REMOTE SENSOR

Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit.

157

REMOTE CON AMP

Selects the unit’s remote control ID.

157

TUNER FRQ STEP

(Asia and General models only)
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.

157

TV FORMAT

Switches the video signal type.

158

MONITOR CHECK

Removes the limitation on HDMI video output.

158

4K MODE

Selects the HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signal format.

158

RECOV./BACKUP

Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings
from the backup.

159

INITIALIZE

Restores the default settings.

159

FIRM UPDATE

Updates the firmware.

159

VERSION

Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.

159

STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

3
4
5

Item

Press PROGRAM to select an item.
Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on
again.

The new settings take effect.

156

Page

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.)
SPEAKER IMP.
8¬MIN

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP)

REMOTE CON AMP
ID1

FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the
speakers connected.

Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:
ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a
unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.

Settings
6  MIN

Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You
can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

8  MIN

Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the
unit.

Settings
ID1, ID2

■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control

Turning on/off the remote control sensor
(REMOTE SENSOR)
REMOTE SENSER
ON

FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE 1 together for 3 seconds.
To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE 2 together for 3 seconds.

Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting
(TUNER FRQ STEP)
(Asia and General models only)

FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

TUNER FRQ STEP
FM50/AM9

Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor
is turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control.
Settings
ON

Turns on the remote control sensor.

OFF

Turns off the remote control sensor.

FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or
region.
Settings

157

FM100/AM10

Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps
and AM by 10-kHz steps.

FM50/AM9

Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps
and AM by 9-kHz steps.

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
TV FORMAT
NTSC

Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE)
4K MODE
MODE 2

FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.

FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

Select the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50Hz)
compatible TV and playback device are connected to the unit.

Settings
NTSC, PAL

Settings

Default
U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC
Other models: PAL

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output
(MONITOR CHECK)

MODE 1

Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0 format.
(4:2:0 format only for VIDEO AUX [HDMI IN] jack)
Depending on the connected devices or HDMI cables, videos may not
be displayed correctly. In this case, select “MODE 2”.

MODE 2

Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:2:0 format.

• When “MODE 1” is selected, use a high-speed HDMI cable that supports 18 Gbps.

MONITOR CHECK
YES

FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI
OUT jack.
Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution”
(p.141) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a
different resolution than the detected resolution.
Settings
YES

Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
resolution supported by the TV only.)

SKIP

Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)

• Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV
after “MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”.

158

Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP)
RECOV./BACKUP
BACKUP

Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE)
FIRM UPDATE
USB

FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup.

New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be
released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit
is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For
details, refer to the information supplied with updates.

■ Backup/recovery procedure

FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO
to start the process.

■ Firmware update procedure

Choices

Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure
you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.

BACKUP

Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory.

RECOVERY

Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when
backup has been created).

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to
start firmware update.
Choices

Note
• Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored
correctly.

USB

Update the firmware using a USB memory device.

NETWORK

Update the firmware via the network.

• The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords).

• If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after
ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in
“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.163).

Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)

INITIALIZE
CANCEL

Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

Restores the default settings for the unit.

VERSION

Choices
VIDEO

Restores the default settings for video configurations.

ALL

Restores the default settings for the unit.

CANCEL

Does not perform an initialization.

x.xx

FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.

• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.155) in the “Information” menu.
• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.

159

SOURCE
RECEIVER

SOURCE

Controlling external devices with the remote control

V-AUX

You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices
(such as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control
code of the external device.

AUDIO

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN 2 3 4

SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

Press TV z.
Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote
control code.

• You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor.

ZONE

3
4

VOLUME

• Ensure that the remote control ID of the external device is set to “ID1”. If any other
ID is selected, the remote control operations may not work properly.

Once the remote control code is successfully registered, SOURCE
blinks twice.

• If the unit’s remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, the
registered codes may be cleared. If this happens, insert new batteries and register
the codes again.

If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.

■ TV operations
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

• Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all
the input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI
Control-compatible devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This
function may not work depending on the specification of the external device.)

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

INPUT

DISPLAY

Registering the remote control code for a TV

BAND
MODE

TUNING

You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have
registered its remote control code.

MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

Switches the video inputs of the TV.

MUTE

Mutes the audio output of the TV.

TV VOL

Adjust the volume of the TV.

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you
can control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input
source selected on the unit.

TV CH
CODE SET

Numeric keys

TV operation keys
TV z

CODE SET

• You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection
keys (p.161). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to
operate the TV (this function may not be available on some TV models).

Refer to “List of remote control codes” in the
CD-ROM to find your TV’s remote control code.

• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list.
If that does not work, try the other codes.

Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 2.

160

TV operation keys

TV CH

Switch the channels of the TV.

TV z

Turns on/off the TV.

RECEIVER

SOURCE

V-AUX

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

SOURCE z
SOURCE
RECEIVER

AUDIO

MAIN 2 3 4

Input selection keys

Registering the remote control codes for
playback devices
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if
you have registered their remote control codes. You can also use
the input selection keys to change the playback devices that are
controlled by the remote control, because their remote control
codes are assigned to the input selection keys.

ZONE

SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

External device
operation keys

Menu operation keys

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Refer to “List of remote control codes” in the
CD-ROM to find the remote control code for your
playback device.

• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If
that does not work, try the other codes.

Press CODE SET.

■ Playback device operations
Once you have registered the remote control code for your
playback device, you can control it using the following keys after
selecting the input source or scene.

• By pressing SOURCE or RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or
external device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and
numeric keys. You can operate the unit after pressing RECEIVER (lights up in
orange), and an external device after pressing SOURCE (lights up in green). For
example, if you register the remote control code of your external device on
TUNER, you can operate the unit’s built-in FM/AM radio after pressing RECEIVER
and the external device after pressing SOURCE.

SOURCE z

Menu operation
keys

SOURCE blinks twice.

External device
operation keys

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 2.

BAND

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

MUTE

Press the input selection key.
For example, press AV 1 to set the remote control code for
the playback device connected to the AV 1 jack.

TV operation keys

INPUT
TV VOL

Numeric keys

Cursor keys

Select an item.

ENTER

Confirms a selected item.

RETURN

Returns to the previous screen.

DISPLAY

MODE

Turns on/off the playback device.

External device
operation keys

Switches information on the display.
TOP MENU

Displays the top menu.

POP-UP/MENU

Displays the pop-up menu.

Stops playback.

Stops playback temporarily.

Starts playback of the selected
song/video.

TV CH
CODE SET

CODE SET

Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote
control code.

Searches forward/backward (by
holding down).

f
g

Skips forward/backward.

Once the remote control code is registered successfully, SOURCE
blinks twice.

Numeric keys

Enter numerical values.

If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.

TV operation keys

Control the TV (p.160).

• For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to
“Configuring scene assignments” (p.74).

161

• These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback
device and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control.

Resetting remote control codes

RECEIVER

SOURCE

SOURCE
RECEIVER

V-AUX

You can reset a remote control code registered to each input
selection key.

AUDIO

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

Input selection keys

Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks twice.

MAIN 2 3 4

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.

ZONE
SCENE

MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

2
3

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

Press the input selection key.
Use the numeric keys to enter “5098”.

OPTION

Once the remote control code is reset successfully, SOURCE blinks
twice.

ENTER

RETURN

If it blinks six times, resetting has failed. Repeat from Step 1.

DISPLAY
BAND

To reset the remote control to factory default settings

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

a Press CODE SET.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

b Press RECEIVER.

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

c Use the numeric keys to enter “9981”.
3

Numeric keys

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

CODE SET

162

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network

RECEIVER

SOURCE

V-AUX

New firmware that provides additional features or product
improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected
to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and
update it.

AUDIO

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN 2 3 4

• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during
firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).

MUTE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

• If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be
possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,
update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.159).

VOLUME

• If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation
mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a
message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.155). You can update the
unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.

• For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!”
appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z
on the front panel.

The firmware update is complete.

Note

ZONE
SCENE

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.159).

Information
icon

BAND

A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed
after ON SCREEN is pressed.

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

Message
System Icon

1
2

Read the on-screen description.
To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to
select “START” and press ENTER.
The on-screen display turns off.

163

APPENDIX
Frequently asked questions
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...

enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This
setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your
system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback
devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.

If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to
optimize the speaker settings again (p.51). If you want to adjust the speaker settings
manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.133).

I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during
operations...

Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...

By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated
(such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you
when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.150) in the
“Setup” menu to turn off the short messages.

If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or
speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum
volume level for the unit in advance (p.139). You can also set the maximum volume for
Zone2 or Zone3 (p.148).

I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by
utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.152).

I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning
on the unit...

The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...

By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically
applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the
volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.139). You can also set the initial
volume for Zone2 or Zone3 (p.148).

When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another
Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,
register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each
remote control (p.157).

We are bothered by volume differences when switching
between input sources…
You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in
the “Option” menu (p.119).

I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device
even when the unit is in standby mode...

I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...

If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output
videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in
standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.144) in the “Setup” menu
to “On” or “Auto”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the
unit when this function is enabled.

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.182). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,

164

Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.

First, check the following:
a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets
securely.
b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.

Power, system and remote control
Problem

Cause

Remedy

The power does not turn on.

The protection circuitry has been activated three times
consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby
indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power.

As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your
nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.

The power does not turn off.

The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.

Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)

The power turns off (standby mode) immediately.

The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.27).

The sleep timer worked.

Turn on the unit and start playback again.

The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used
for the specified time.

To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup”
menu to “Off” (p.152).

The speaker impedance setting is incorrect.

Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.157).

The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short
circuit.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.27).

The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of
the unit is too high.

Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to
“Off” (p.153).

The unit enters standby mode automatically.

165

Problem

Cause

Remedy

The unit is not reacting.

The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.

Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)

The unit is out of the operating range.

Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5).

The batteries are weak.

Replace with new batteries.

The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or
strong lighting.

Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.

The remote control is set to control external devices.

Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in
orange).

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.157).

The remote control is set to control the unit.

Press SOURCE to set the remote control to control external devices (the key lights
up in green).

The corresponding remote control code is not set properly.

Set the remote control code again (p.160). Even if the remote control code is
registered properly, some products may not respond to the remote control.

The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.

External devices cannot be controlled using the
remote control.

166

Audio
Problem

No sound.

Cause

Remedy

Another input source is selected.

Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.

Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio
format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.154).

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The maximum volume is set.

Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.139).

The volume cannot be increased.
A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel.

To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.154).

The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker.

To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.138).

Audio output of the speaker is disabled.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.51) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change
the speaker settings (p.134).

The volume of the speaker is set too low.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.51) or use “Livello” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the
speaker volume (p.137).

The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is
defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.

The speaker is malfunctioning.

To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be
malfunctioning.

The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency
signals.

To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu
(p.138).

Subwoofer output is disabled.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.51) or set “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” in the “Setup”
menu to “Use” (p.135).

The volume of the subwoofer is too low.

Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.

The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function.

Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.

No sound is coming from a specific speaker.

No sound is coming from the subwoofer.

167

Problem

Cause

Remedy

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.

The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from
the SPEAKERS terminals.

In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.143).

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds
the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.

Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.

A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with
an HDMI cable.

Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.39).

(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.

Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack
(p.143).

(If you are trying to use ARC)
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.

Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.143). Also, enable ARC on the TV.

No sound from the Zone2 TV (connected to the
unit with HDMI).

The audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is
disabled.

Set “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.149).

Only the front speakers work on multichannel
audio.

The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as
PCM) only.

To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.154). If necessary,
change the digital audio output setting on the playback device.

The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device.

Move the unit further away from the device.

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The volume of the unit is too high.

Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to
“Off” (p.153).

A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on.

Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.

If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2 or
Zone4, HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone
operations due to internal circuitry switching.

For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio” (p.106).

No sound from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).

No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is
used).

Noise/hum is heard.

The sound is distorted.

The sound is interrupted.

168

Video
Problem

No video.

No video from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).

Cause

Remedy

Another input source is selected on the unit.

Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Another input source is selected on the TV.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV.

Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.158).

The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is
defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.

To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video
Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.154). For information about video signals
supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.184).

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
If you want to play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, both
the TV and playback device must support HDCP 2.2.

The playback device that supports HDCP 2.2 is connected to the
VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack.

To play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, connect the
playback device to the HDMI (AV 1–7) jack (p.42).

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over
the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI.

You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with
an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.39).

Another input source is selected on the TV.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

(If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone)
Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected.

Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you
are using (p.72).

(If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4)
HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone
operations due to internal circuitry switching.

For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio” (p.106).

The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.

The video is interrupted.

169

FM/AM radio
Problem

Cause

Remedy

There is multi-path interference.

Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio
reception (p.119).

FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy.

The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats, or other electrical equipment.

It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor
AM antenna.
Select the station manually (p.82).

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.

Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.

Select the station manually (p.82).

The AM radio signal is weak.

Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with
the supplied AM antenna.
AM radio stations cannot be registered as
presets.

Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations. Register AM radio stations
manually (p.82).

Auto Preset has been used.

170

Bluetooth
Problem

A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.

No sound is produced, or the sound is
interrupted during playback.

Cause

Remedy

The Bluetooth function of the unit is disabled.

Enable the Bluetooth function (p.147).

Another Bluetooth device is already connected to the unit.

Terminate the current Bluetooth connection and then establish a new connection
(p.86).

The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart.

Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.

There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.

Move the unit away from those devices.

The Bluetooth device does not support A2DP.

Use a Bluetooth device that supports A2DP.

The connection information registered on the Bluetooth device is
not working for some reason.

Delete the connection information on the Bluetooth device, and then establish a
connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.86).

The volume of the Bluetooth device is set too low.

Turn up the volume of the Bluetooth device.

The Bluetooth device is not set to send audio signals to the unit.

Switch the audio output of the Bluetooth device to the unit.

The Bluetooth connection has been terminated.

Establish a Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again
(p.86).

The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart.

Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.

There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.

Move the unit away from those devices.

171

USB and network
Problem

Cause

Remedy

The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely.

Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.

The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32.

Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.

Folders and files in the USB device cannot be
viewed.

The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption.

Use a USB device without an encryption function.

The files in the USB device cannot be played back
continuously.

Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.

If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files
in the playback folder.

The network feature does not function.

The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained
properly.

Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”
menu to “On” on the unit (p.145). If you want to configure the network parameters
manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other
network devices in your network (p.145).

The wireless router (access point) is turned off.

Turn on the wireless router.

The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart.

Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other.

There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router
(access point).

Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are
no obstacles between them.

Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood
might disturb the wireless communication.

Turn off these devices.

Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the
wireless router (access point).

Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point).

The media sharing setting is not correct.

Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music
contents are shared (p.94).

Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access
of the unit to your PC.

Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.

The unit and PC are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and the PC to the same network.

The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.146).

The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.

Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For
information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music
stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.94).

The unit does not detect the USB device.

The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a
wireless router (access point).

Wireless network is not found.

The unit does not detect the PC.

The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played
back.

172

Problem

Cause

Remedy

The files in the PC cannot be played back
continuously.

Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.

If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files
in the playback folder.

The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.

There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have
been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.

The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting
silence.

Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try
the station later or select another station.

Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).

Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be
played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.
The port number varies depending on the radio station.

The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router.

Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the
router. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.

The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network.

The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the
unit (p.146).

It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network.

Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.159).

The Internet radio cannot be played.

The iPod does not recognize the unit when using
AirPlay.

The application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.

Firmware update via the network is failed.

173

Error indications on the front display
Message

Cause

Remedy

Access denied

Access to the PC is denied.

Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared
(p.94).

Access error

The unit cannot access the USB device.

Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

The unit cannot access the iPod.

Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.

The connected iPod is not supported by the unit.

Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.87).
Make sure your router and modem are turned on.

There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.
Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.47).
Check SP Wires

The speaker cables short circuit.

Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.

Internal Error

An internal error has occurred.

Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

No content

There are no playable files in the selected folder.

Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.

The unit cannot detect the USB device.

Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

No device
The unit cannot detect the iPod.

Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.

Please wait

The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.

Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn
it on again.

RemID Mismatch

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.157).

Remote Off

The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the
remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off.

Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.157).

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for
some reasons.

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some
reason.

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be
defective.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some
reason.

Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the
formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.94). If
the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with
heavy traffic.

Unable to play

USB Overloaded

An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device.

Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

Version error

Firmware update is failed.

Update the firmware again.

174

Glossary
Audio information

Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three
modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for
game sources (for 2-channel sources only).

■ Audio decoding format

Dolby Surround

Dolby Atmos

Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1
content for playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby surround is compatible with traditional
speaker layouts, as well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ in-ceiling speakers or
products with Dolby speaker technology.

Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and immersion to the
Home Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces
audio as independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and move dynamically
throughout the 3 dimensional listening space during playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the
introduction of a height plane of sound above the listener.

Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a
high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

Dolby Atmos Stream
Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or
Dolby TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains
special metadata that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This object audio data is
decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV receiver and scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker
systems of every size and configuration.

DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super
Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as 2.8224 MHz and 5.6448
MHz). The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB.
This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.

Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

DTS 96/24

Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby
Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.

DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This
format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital
Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.

Dolby Digital Plus

DTS Digital Surround

Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems
that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

Dolby Enabled Speaker

DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This
decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a
surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a
discrete surround back channel is recorded.

DTS-ES

A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, products utilizing Dolby speaker technology
employ the ceiling above you as a reflective surface for reproducing audio in the height plane above the
listener. Dolby enabled speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal processing that
can be built into a conventional speaker, or a standalone speaker module, minimally impacting the overall
speaker system footprint while providing an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and Dolby
surround playback.

DTS Express
DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher
compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is
developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.

175

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

WAV

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on
BD (Blu-ray discs).

Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by
converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other
compression methods.

DTS-HD Master Audio

One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic
technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of
compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

WMA (Windows Media Audio)

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home
theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

■ Others

DTS Neo:6

Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)

DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete
full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.

A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification
connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a
consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.

FLAC

LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel

FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio
formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.

This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This
channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio
effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.

MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this
compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data
quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

Lip sync
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an
increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag
between audio and video output.

MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming
services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality
than MP3.

PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This
technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called
Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).

Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal
is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.
When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a
numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more
accurate.

176

HDMI and video information

Network information

Component video signal

SSID

With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and
the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because
each of these signals is independent.

SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point.

Wi-Fi

With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined
and transmitted with a single cable.

Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the
Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making
connections with network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance
interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark.

Deep Color

WPS

Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available
colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems
process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology
allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate
on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy
establishment of a wireless home network.

Composite video signal

HDCP
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a digital copy protection form that prevents copying of
digital contents as it travels across connections (such as HDMI).

HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video
signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable
without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a
secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.

x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than
sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with
the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,
natural images.

177

Yamaha technologies
CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is
best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions
(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are
differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,
Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own
home.

CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the
accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.

CINEMA DSP HD3
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP HD3 feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the
accurate and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room.

Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music
formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound
system.

SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with
front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.

Virtual CINEMA FRONT
Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers
with front surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.

Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without
presence speakers. Even if the presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in
your room.

Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)
Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround back
speakers. Even if the surround back speakers are not connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear
sound filed of CINEMA DSP.

178

■ File formats

Supported devices and file formats

❑ USB/PC (NAS)

■ Supported devices

Sampling
frequency (kHz)

Quantization
bitrate (bit)

Bitrate

The number
of channels

Gapless
playback

WAV *

32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192

16/24

—

✔

• A Bluetooth device may not be detected by the unit or some feature may not be
compatible, depending on the model.

MP3

32/44.1/48

—

8 to 320

—

WMA

32/44.1/48

—

8 to 320

—

❑ USB devices

MPEG-4 AAC

32/44.1/48

—

8 to 320

—

• The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable
audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format.

FLAC

32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192

16/24

—

✔

ALAC

32/44.1/48/88.2/96

16/24

—

✔

AIFF

32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192

16/24

—

✔

DSD

2.8 MHz/5.6 MHz

—

File

❑ Bluetooth device
• The unit supports Bluetooth devices that support A2DP or AVRCP.

• Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB
chargers or USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc.
• USB devices with encryption cannot be used.
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of
the USB storage device.

* Linear PCM format only

❑ iPod

• To play back FLAC files stored on a PC or NAS, you need to install server software that supports sharing of
FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.
• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.

Made for.

iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s, iPhone 4,
iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G
iPod touch (2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation)
iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th generation)
(as of May 2015)
• An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible,
depending on the model or software version of the iPod.

❑ AirPlay
AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X
Mountain Lion or later, and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.
(as of May 2015)

179

Video signal flow
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are
output to a TV as shown below.

■ Video conversion table
• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.141) in the “Setup” menu.
• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.

Video device

The unit

HDMI out

TV
Resolution

480i/
576i

480p/
576p

720p

1080i

1080p

480i/576i

720p

1080i

1080p/
50, 60 Hz

480p/576p

HDMI in

HDMI out

HDMI

HDMI in

1080p/24 Hz

COMPONENT
VIDEO

COMPONENT
720p
VIDEO in

1080i

480i/576i

COMPONENT
VIDEO out
COMPONENT
VIDEO

480p/576p

VIDEO

480p/
576p

720p

1080i

1080p

480i/
576i

m
m
m
m
m

1080p
VIDEO in

480i/
576i

4K
COMPONENT
VIDEO in

VIDEO
out

COMPONENT VIDEO out

VIDEO out
VIDEO

VIDEO

VIDEO in

480i/576i

m
m: Available

180

Multi-zone output
■ Audio output

■ Video output

Using the unit’s
internal amplifier (p.36)
Out
In
Digital audio (HDMI)
Digital audio
(COAXIAL/OPTICAL)

EXTRA SP 1–2 jacks
Zone2

Zone3

m (*3)

Using an external amplifier (p.105)
Out
ZONE OUT jacks
Zone2

Zone3

m (*3)

HDMI OUT 2
(ZONE OUT) jack

Zone2 (*1) Zone4 (*2)
m (*4)

m (*6)

Analog audio
(AUDIO)

USB
(including iPod) (*7)

Network sources (*7)

TUNER

m (*5)

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks
(*8)
COMPONENT
VIDEO

VIDEO

Zone2/3

HDMI video
Component video
Composite video
On-screen display
(browse/playback)

HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack (*9)

Zone2

Zone4

m
m
m
m: Available

*8 Available when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” or “Zone3”
*9 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” or “Zone4”
m: Available

*1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” (Audio Output: On)
*2 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone4”
*3 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input
source selected in the main zone is selected)
Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
*4 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input
source selected in the main zone is selected)
*5 HDMI audio pass-through (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source selected in the
main zone is selected)
*6 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input
*7 To play back DSD audio in Zone2/Zone3, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2/Zone3 input with the web
control (p.111) or use the party mode (p.109).

181

(Example)

Information on HDMI

HDMI Control

HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as
power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback
devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with
an HDMI cable.

Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device

Playback starts

Press SCENE (BD/DVD)

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.

For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.39) and “Connecting video
devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.42).

For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.

Operations available from the TV’s remote control
• Standby synchronization

• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.

• Volume control including mute

1
2

• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)

Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
Configure the settings of the unit.
a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
b Press ON SCREEN.

(Example)

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

HDMI Control

ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

Playback device
also turns off

RETURN

The unit turns off
(standby)

DISPLAY

c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

Turn off the TV

Operations available from the unit’s remote control
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene
selection (p.73)
• Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)
• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering
remote control codes (p.161)

182

d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.

Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video
signal to the TV.
Check the following after the HDMI Control settings.

1
2
e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.

– “ARC” (p.143) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.

g Press ON SCREEN.

Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD players).

Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and
playback devices.

– The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack
marked “ARC”) on the TV.
Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to
the instruction manual for the TV.

• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.143) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an audio
cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.39).

Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.

• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1
jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.143) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use
the SCENE function (p.74), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE (TV).

Check the followings.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected.
If not, select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched
to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following:

f Use the cursor keys to select “On”.

5
6
7

Select a TV program with the TV remote control.

Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning
off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in
Step 4. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices
exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works
more effectively.
• We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices.

183

HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
Audio signal type

Audio signal format

Compatible media (example)

2ch Linear PCM

2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit

CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio

Multichannel Linear PCM

8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit

DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),
HD DVD

DSD

2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit

SACD

Bitstream

Dolby Digital, DTS

DVD-Video

Bitstream
(High definition audio)

Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio, DTS Express

Video signals
The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
• VGA

• 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 480i/60 Hz

• 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 576i/50 Hz

• 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• 480p/60 Hz

• 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• 576p/50 Hz

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending
on the type of the DVD player.
• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for each device.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device
outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.

184

Reference diagram (rear panel)

HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

NETWORK

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

( 3 NET )

WIRELESS

AV 7

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

AC IN

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 3

AV 4

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2

TRIGGER
OUT

REMOTE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

PHONO

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

RS-232C

OUT

(2 TV)

AV 1

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

PR Y
(SINGLE)

AV 3

(FRONT)

GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F. PRESENCE R. PRESENCE

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

(REAR)

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

SPEAKERS

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP2

CENTER

FRONT

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F. PRESENCE/BI-AMP
EXTRA SP1

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

75Ω

SINGLE

(RX-A3050 U.S.A. model)

• The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections.

185

Trademarks
Bluetooth protocol stack (Blue SDK)

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby
Atmos, Dolby Surround, Pro Logic, Surround EX, and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Copyright 1999-2014 OpenSynergy GmbH
All rights reserved. All unpublished rights reserved.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the Wi-Fi
Alliance.
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup Identifier Mark is a mark of the Wi-Fi
Alliance.
This receiver supports network connections.

For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under
license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, &
DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and
DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All
Rights Reserved.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.

x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

Google Noto Fonts
Copyright © 2012 Google Inc. All rights reserved.
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”);
you may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied.
See the License for the specific language governing permissions
and limitations under the License.

“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic
accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or
iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet
Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its
compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may
affect wireless performance.

iTunes, AirPlay, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, iPod touch, and Safari are
trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Windows™

Explanations regarding GPL

App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.

This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some
sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and
redistribute this open-source code only. For information on
GPL/LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the
GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website
(http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/).

Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha
Corporation is under license.

Android™

Google Play™

Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Blu-ray is a trademark of the Blu-ray Disc Association.

186

Specifications
Input jacks
• Analog Audio
Audio x 9 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, V-AUX)

• Video

• Audio Format

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

- Dolby Atmos

- Composite x 1

- Dolby TrueHD

- Component x 1

- Dolby Digital Plus

• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
Optical x 3 (AV 3, AUDIO 1–2)
Coaxial x 3 (AV 1–2, AUDIO 3)

- Dolby Digital

• HDMI Output
HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT

1–2*5)

*5 barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2/ZONE4)
• Video

- DTS-HD Master Audio
- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
- DTS Express

Composite x 5 (AV 1–4, V-AUX)

Other jacks

- DTS

Component x 3 (AV 1–3)

• YPAO MIC x 1

- DSD 2-ch to 6-ch

• HDMI Input
HDMI x 8 (AV 1–7, V-AUX)
• Others

- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)

• REMOTE IN x 1

• Content Protection: HDCP compatible

• REMOTE OUT x 1

(HDMI [AV 1–7]: HDCP 2.2 compatible)

• TRIGGER OUT x 2

USB x 1 (USB2.0)
NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)

Output jacks
• Analog Audio
- Speaker Out x 11 (9 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP 1 L/R*1, EXTRA SP 2 L/R*2)
*1 Note: Assignment is possible
[ZONE2, ZONE3, F.PRESENCE, BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]
*2 Note: Assignment is possible
[ZONE2, ZONE3, R.PRESENCE]
- Subwoofer Out x 2
(SUBWOOFER 1–2, Stereo/Front&Rear/Monox2)
- Headphone x 1
[RX-A3050]
- Pre Out x 11 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

• Link Function: CEC supported

• RS-232C x 1

TUNER

HDMI
• HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC
(Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K Ultra HD
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
- VGA

• Analog Tuner
[U.K. and Europe models]
FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
[Other models]
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)

- 480i/60 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz

USB

- 480p/60 Hz

• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory

- 576p/50 Hz

• Current Supply Capacity: 1 A

- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

Bluetooth

- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• Sink Function

- 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet)

SURROUND BACK L/R, F.PRESENCE L/R*3, R.PRESENCE L/R*4)

• Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device

*3 Note: barter to ZONE2

• Bluetooth Version .................................................Ver. 2.1+EDR

*4 Note: barter to ZONE3

• Supported Profile ................................................ A2DP, AVRCP

[RX-A2050]

• Supported Codec .....................................................SBC, AAC

- Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
• Wireless Output............................................. Bluetooth Class 2

SURROUND BACK L/R)

• Maximum Communication Distance .......................10 m (33 ft)

- ZONE OUT x 2 (ZONE2/ZONE3)

187

Network

Audio Section

• PC Client Function

• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)

• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5

• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)

[RX-A3050]

[RX-A3050]
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 )

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 6 )

Front L/R.................................................................. 200 W/ch

Front L/R .......................................................... 165 W+165 W

Center ..................................................................... 200 W/ch

• Internet Radio

Center...........................................................................165 W

Surround L/R ........................................................... 200 W/ch

• WiFi function

Surround L/R ................................................... 165 W+165 W

Surround Back L/R .................................................. 200 W/ch

- Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method

Surround Back L/R .......................................... 165 W+165 W

Front Presence L/R.................................................. 200 W/ch

- Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection

Front Presence L/R.......................................... 165 W+165 W

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 )

Front L/R.................................................................. 185 W/ch

- Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device

Front L/R .......................................................... 150 W+150 W

Center ..................................................................... 185 W/ch

- Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES),

Center...........................................................................150 W

Surround L/R ........................................................... 185 W/ch

Surround L/R ................................................... 150 W+150 W

Surround Back L/R .................................................. 185 W/ch

- Radio Frequency Band: 2.4 GHz

Surround Back L/R .......................................... 150 W+150 W

Front Presence L/R.................................................. 185 W/ch

- Wireless Network Standard: IEEE 802.11 b/g/n

Front Presence L/R.......................................... 150 W+150 W

• AirPlay supported

and USB connection

Mixed Mode

Compatible Decoding Formats

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 )
Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models]....................... 230 W/ch

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )
Front L/R .......................................................... 165 W+165 W

[RX-A2050]

• Decoding Format

Center...........................................................................165 W

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 )

- Dolby Atmos

Surround L/R ................................................... 165 W+165 W

Front L/R.................................................................. 190 W/ch

- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus

Surround Back L/R .......................................... 165 W+165 W

Center ..................................................................... 190 W/ch

- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX

Front Presence L/R.......................................... 165 W+165 W

Surround L/R ........................................................... 190 W/ch

- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express

Surround Back L/R .................................................. 190 W/ch

[RX-A2050]
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 6 )

Front Presence L/R.................................................. 190 W/ch

- DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1

Front L/R .......................................................... 150 W+150 W

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )

- DTS Digital Surround

Center...........................................................................150 W

Front L/R.................................................................. 175 W/ch

• Post Decoding Format

Surround L/R ................................................... 150 W+150 W

Center ..................................................................... 175 W/ch

- Dolby Pro Logic

Surround Back L/R .......................................... 150 W+150 W

Surround L/R ........................................................... 175 W/ch

- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,

Front Presence L/R.......................................... 150 W+150 W

Surround Back L/R .................................................. 175 W/ch

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 )

Front Presence L/R.................................................. 175 W/ch

Dolby Pro Logic II Game
- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game

Front L/R .......................................................... 140 W+140 W

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 )

Center...........................................................................140 W

Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models]....................... 220 W/ch

- Dolby Surround

Surround L/R ................................................... 140 W+140 W

- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema

Surround Back L/R .......................................... 140 W+140 W
Front Presence L/R.......................................... 140 W+140 W
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )
Front L/R .......................................................... 155 W+155 W
Center...........................................................................155 W
Surround L/R ................................................... 155 W+155 W
Surround Back L/R .......................................... 155 W+155 W
Front Presence L/R.......................................... 155 W+155 W
En

188

• Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven)
[RX-A3050]
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 )
Front L/R ................................................................. 230 W/ch
Center ..................................................................... 230 W/ch
Surround L/R........................................................... 230 W/ch

• Maximum Input Signal

• Tone Control Characteristics

PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .............................. 60 mV or more
AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................ 2.4 V or more
• Output Level / Output Impedance
SUBWOOFER (50 Hz) ......................................... 1.0 V/470 
Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz) ............................. 1.0 V/470 

Front Presence L/R ................................................. 230 W/ch

ZONE OUT ............................................................. 1.0 V/470 

Front L/R ................................................................. 230 W/ch
Center ..................................................................... 230 W/ch
Surround L/R........................................................... 230 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ................................................. 230 W/ch
Front Presence L/R ................................................. 230 W/ch
[RX-A2050]
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 )
Front L/R ................................................................. 220 W/ch
Center ..................................................................... 220 W/ch
Surround L/R........................................................... 220 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ................................................. 220 W/ch
Front Presence L/R ................................................. 220 W/ch
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 )
Front L/R ................................................................. 220 W/ch

• Headphone Impedance .......................................16  or more
• Frequency Response

Surround Back L/R ................................................. 220 W/ch
Front Presence L/R ................................................. 220 W/ch

• RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) ......................................... 0±0.5 dB

[RX-A2050]
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 ) ............................... 165/210/285/405 W
• Damping Factor
Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8  ............................................. 150 or more
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance

Bass Boost/Cut ........................ ±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
Bass Turnover .............................................................350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut......................±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)

• Filter Characteristics
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small)
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .....................................................24 dB/oct.

[RX-A3050]
PHONO to PreOut (1 kHz, 1 V)......................... 0.04% or less
AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 75 W/ 8 )
......................................................................... 0.04% or less

Video Section
• Video Signal Type ....................................... NTSC/PAL/SECAM
• Video Signal Level

[RX-A2050]
PHONO to PreOut (1 kHz, 1 V)......................... 0.04% or less

Composite..............................................................1 Vp-p/75 

AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 70 W/ 8 )

Component

......................................................................... 0.04% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

Y ..........................................................................1 Vp-p/75 
Pb/Pr ................................................................0.7 Vp-p/75 

(Pure Direct, Input 1 k Shorted, Speaker Out)

• Video Maximum Input Level........................... 1.5 Vp-p or more

PHONO .............................................................. 95 dB or more

• Signal to Noise Ratio.......................................... 60 dB or more

• Dynamic Power (IHF)
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 ) ............................... 175/220/295/410 W

Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz
Zone2/Zone3

..................................................................................12 dB/oct.

• Total Harmonic Distortion

AUDIO 2 etc. ................................................... 110 dB or more
[RX-A3050]

Bass Turnover .............................................................350 Hz

Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz

AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ................................+0/-3 dB

Center ..................................................................... 220 W/ch
Surround L/R........................................................... 220 W/ch

Bass Boost/Cut ........................ ±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
Treble Boost/Cut......................±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)

PRE OUT

Surround Back L/R ................................................. 230 W/ch
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 )

Main Zone

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Speaker Out ....................................................... 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation
(Input 1 k Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO ................................................... 75 dB/60 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc. .......................................... 75 dB/60 dB or more

• Monitor Out Frequency Response
Component (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT)
........................................................... 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB

FM Section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models].............. 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models]

• Volume Control

...................................... 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz

PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ) ................................3.5 mV/47 k

Main Zone ................ MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)

AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ).......................200 mV/47 k

Zone2/Zone3 ............ MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)

[Other models] ................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Mono ................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf)

189

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ......................................................... 65 dB/64 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ............................................................ 0.5%/0.6%
• Antenna Input ................................................75  unbalanced

AM section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz

• Standby Power Consumption
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off
.........................................................................................0.1 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),
Network Standby Off ........................................................1.4 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On,
Bluetooth Standby Off
Wired .............................................................................2.2 W
Wireless (Wi-Fi)..............................................................2.2 W

[Asia and General models]...... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz

Wireless Direct ..............................................................2.3 W

[Other models]......................................... 531 kHz to 1611 kHz

HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On
(Wired), Bluetooth Standby On ........................................2.0 W

General

HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),

• Power Supply

Network Standby On (Wireless Direct), Bluetooth Standby On

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[General model]............ AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model] ................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model]................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ............................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models].............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia model] ................................... AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

.........................................................................................3.1 W
• Maximum Power Consumption
[Asia and General models] ...........................................1210 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
..................... 435 x 192 x 474 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/2” x 18-5/8”)
* Including legs and protrusions

• Reference Dimensions (W x H x D) (with wireless antenna
• Power Consumption

upright)......... 435 x 247 x 474 mm (17-1/8” x 9-3/4” x 18-5/8”)

[Canada model].............................................................. 400 W
[Korea model]................................................................. 390 W
[Other models]................................................................ 490 W

• Weight
[RX-A3050]
[China, U.K. and Europe models] ..............19.6 kg (43.2 lbs)
[Other models] ...........................................18.1 kg (39.9 lbs)
[RX-A2050]....................................................17.0 kg (37.5 lbs)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

190

Index
Symbols
Exclamation mark (!)
Lock icon (o) 152

155, 163

Numerics
2.1-channel system 24
2ch Stereo 78
4K Ultra HD 184
5.1-channel system 22
7.1-channel system 21
9.2+2-channel system 20
9.2-channel system 20, 21
9ch Stereo 78

Lipsync

ECO 152
Error indication (front display) 174
External device control (remote control)
External power amplifier 37
Extra Bass 117

F
Firmware update 156, 159
FM radio 81
Frequency step setting 81, 157
Front display information 114
114

Backup/recovery of the settings 159
Banana plug 27
Basic speaker configuration 20
Bluetooth 86
Bluetooth Standby 147
Bookmark 100

191

MAC Address Filter 146
Max Volume 139, 148
Memory Guard 152
Menu language selection 49
Multiple room playback 103
Muting 72, 109

N
160

NAS content playback 95
Network Connection 144
Network information 155
Network Name 146
Network Standby 145

115

P
Parametric EQ 137
Party mode 109
Power Amp Assign 133
Preset station selection (FM/AM radio)
Pure Direct 80

R
Radio Data System tuning 83
Remote control 17
Remote control ID 157
Rename 121, 125, 146
Repeat 89, 93, 97
Restoring the default settings 159

Option menu

Initial Volume 139, 148
Input jack assignment 150
Input Trim 119
Internet radio 98
iPod content playback 88
iPod content playback (AirPlay)

176

HDCP 45, 168, 169
HDMI OUT2 Assign 149
HDMI output selection 72
HDMI signal compatibility 184
Headphones 78
Hi-Res Mode 118

CINEMA DSP 8, 76
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode 140
Compressed Music Enhancer 80
Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer)

Decoder Off (front display information) 114
Dialogue 117, 154
Dimmer (Front Display) 150
DLNA 94
DMC (Digital Media Controller) 122
Dolby Atmos 20, 50, 79, 140
DSP Program (front display information) 114

A
Adaptive DRC 116
ADVANCED SETUP 156
Advanced speaker configuration 28
AirPlay 101
AM radio 81
ARC (Audio Return Channel) 143, 183
Audio Decoder (front display information)
Auto Power Standby 152
Auto Preset (FM radio) 85

S
101

SCENE function 73
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format
Setup menu 129

158

Short Message 150
Shortcut (Registering favorite items)
Shuffle 89, 93, 97
Signal information 154
Sleep timer 17, 109
Sound program 76, 77
Speaker impedance 19, 26, 157
Standby Through 144
Straight decode 79
Subwoofer Trim 117
Surround decoder 79

110

T
Test Tone 138
Tone Control 116
Trigger function 48, 151

U
USB storage device content playback

V
Virtual CINEMA FRONT 23, 78
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 21, 140
Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) 20, 140

W
Wallpaper 151
Web control 111
Wireless (Wi-Fi) 64, 144
Wireless Direct 70, 144
WPS 66, 177

Y
YPAO
(Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer)
YPAO Volume 116

Z
Zone

103, 147

192

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V4.4 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Extract, Print high-res
Create Date                     : 2015:07:01 13:23:01+09:00
Modify Date                     : 2015:07:01 13:23:01+09:00
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Metadata Date                   : 2015:07:01 13:23:01+09:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:6578729a-9c8f-4068-a0c5-58efe00a7887
Instance ID                     : uuid:b1732064-313e-49b1-985e-109fb31c8799
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 193

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Yamaha RX A3050/RX A2050 Owner’s Manual Web YH116A0 EN A3050 Om UCRABGLF

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation